1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5185 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5456 arg "newline-insert newline"
5462 \begin_layout Subsection
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5484 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5494 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5503 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5504 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5505 describing some general features of all four of them.
5508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5513 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5515 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5524 reset the environment to
5528 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5529 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5530 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5534 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5538 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5545 \begin_layout Standard
5546 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5547 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5549 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5550 you read all of section
5551 \begin_inset space ~
5555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5557 reference "sec:Nesting"
5564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5566 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5590 paragraph environment.
5591 It has the following properties:
5594 \begin_layout Itemize
5595 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5603 \begin_layout Itemize
5604 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5608 \begin_layout Itemize
5609 The items can have any length.
5610 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5611 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5623 environment inside another
5627 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5636 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5639 \begin_layout Itemize
5641 \begin_inset space ~
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5647 reference "sec:Nesting"
5651 for a full explanation of nesting.
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5665 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5670 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 The label for the first level
5678 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The label for the second level is a dash.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5692 \begin_layout Itemize
5693 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 Back out to the third level.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 Back to the second level.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 Back to the outermost level.
5711 \begin_layout Standard
5712 These are the default labels for an
5717 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5722 dialog in the submenu
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5736 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5740 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5741 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5743 \begin_inset space ~
5747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5749 reference "sec:Nesting"
5756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5770 name "sec:Enumerate"
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5783 It has these properties:
5786 \begin_layout Enumerate
5787 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5791 \begin_layout Enumerate
5792 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5797 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5800 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 environment resets the counter to one.
5808 \begin_layout Enumerate
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5822 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5823 Items can have any length.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5834 \begin_layout Enumerate
5835 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5848 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5849 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 The first level of an
5861 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5871 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Back to the third level
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 Back to the second level.
5895 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 Back to the outermost level.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5904 environment, see section
5905 \begin_inset space ~
5909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5911 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5916 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 There is more to nesting
5924 environments than we've stated here.
5925 You should read section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sec:Nesting"
5936 to learn more about nesting.
5939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5941 \begin_inset Index idx
5944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5958 list has no fixed label.
5959 Instead, LyX uses the first
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5967 of the first line as the label.
5971 \begin_layout Description
5972 Example: This is an example of the
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5980 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5993 it is meant that the first usage of the
5997 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5999 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6012 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6015 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset space ~
6025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6027 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6031 for more information.) Here is an example:
6034 \begin_layout Description
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6039 Example: This one shows how to use a
6042 \begin_inset space ~
6054 \begin_layout Description
6055 Usage: You should use the
6059 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6060 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6062 It's not a good idea to use a
6066 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6067 You're better off using
6079 paragraphs into them.
6082 \begin_layout Description
6083 Nesting: You can nest
6087 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6091 \begin_layout Standard
6092 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6093 them from the first line.
6096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6098 \begin_inset Index idx
6101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6115 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6118 \begin_layout Standard
6127 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6129 Here are its properties:
6132 \begin_layout Labeling
6133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6135 \begin_inset space ~
6138 labels LyX uses the first
6139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6146 of each line as the item label.
6151 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6152 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6153 space as described above.
6156 \begin_layout Labeling
6157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6158 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6159 the body of the item text.
6160 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6161 label width plus a little extra space.
6165 \begin_layout Labeling
6166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6168 \begin_inset space ~
6171 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6173 If the label width is larger, the label
6174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6181 into the first line.
6182 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6183 margin of the rest of the item text.
6186 \begin_layout Labeling
6187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6189 \begin_inset space ~
6192 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6197 environment has the same left margin.
6198 \begin_inset Newline newline
6201 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6204 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6206 \begin_inset space ~
6211 dialog (toolbar button
6214 arg "layout-paragraph"
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 determines the default label width.
6227 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6236 multiple times instead.
6237 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6246 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6254 every time you alter a label in a
6259 \begin_inset Newline newline
6262 The predefined default width is the length of
6263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6282 list the same way as the
6286 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6292 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6296 \begin_layout Standard
6301 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6302 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6304 \begin_inset space ~
6308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6310 reference "sec:Nesting"
6314 to learn about nesting.
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6318 There is yet another feature of the
6322 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6324 You can use additional
6328 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6333 are documented in section
6334 \begin_inset space ~
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6340 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6345 Here are some examples:
6348 \begin_layout Labeling
6349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6350 Left The default for
6357 \begin_layout Labeling
6358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6366 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6382 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6385 \begin_layout Subsection
6387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6389 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6394 \begin_inset Index idx
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6406 \begin_layout Standard
6407 The features described in this section require that the module
6409 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6411 is loaded in the document settings.
6412 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6417 \begin_inset Index idx
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6430 Custom Enumerate Lists
6431 \begin_inset Index idx
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6451 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6452 There you add the command
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 in TeX Code (shortcut
6474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6475 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6482 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6495 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6502 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6503 For capital Roman numerals replace
6515 in the command above.
6516 For Arabic numerals use
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6531 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6556 You can only number 26
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6560 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6568 \begin_layout Standard
6569 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6570 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6577 \begin_layout Enumerate
6578 \begin_inset Argument 1
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6607 \begin_layout Enumerate
6608 \begin_inset Argument 1
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6634 \begin_layout Enumerate
6639 \begin_layout Enumerate
6640 \begin_inset Argument 1
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 \begin_layout Enumerate
6668 \begin_inset Argument 1
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6698 For this list these commands were used:
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6712 \begin_inset Newline newline
6720 \begin_inset Newline newline
6728 \begin_inset Newline newline
6738 \begin_layout Standard
6745 makes the label emphasized and
6754 \begin_layout Standard
6755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6763 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6764 lists until you change the definition.
6772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6787 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6790 \begin_layout Enumerate
6791 \begin_inset Argument 1
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_inset Note Note
6816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 goes back to default numbering
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6833 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6837 \begin_layout Standard
6838 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6843 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6844 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6865 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6867 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6868 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6869 of a normal enumeration.
6870 There, insert the command
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6884 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Enumerate
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6897 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 This enumeration starts at 4
6923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6925 \begin_inset Index idx
6928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6940 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6947 \begin_layout Itemize
6948 with standard spacing
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6954 Add there the command
6958 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6961 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_inset Argument 1
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6999 \begin_inset Index idx
7002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7009 For more information see its documentation,
7010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7019 \begin_layout Standard
7020 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7022 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7023 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7027 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate
7031 \begin_inset Argument 1
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 with negative indentation
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7060 Further Customization
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 Lists ! Customization
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 You can also change the style of description lists.
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7085 changes the description label font, the command
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 sets the list style.
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 An example where the command
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7107 itshape, style=nextline
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7114 \begin_layout Description
7116 \begin_inset space ~
7120 \begin_inset Argument 1
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7131 itshape, style=nextline
7141 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7142 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7146 \begin_layout Description
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7151 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7152 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7153 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7156 \begin_layout Standard
7157 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7163 \begin_inset Index idx
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7173 For more information see its documentation
7174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7183 \begin_layout Subsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7199 \begin_inset space ~
7202 Address: An Overview
7205 \begin_layout Standard
7206 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7220 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7221 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7222 In contrast, you can use the
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7234 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7235 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7240 Of course, you're not limited to using
7247 \begin_inset space ~
7256 \begin_inset space ~
7261 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7262 some European academic papers.
7265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7269 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7281 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7282 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7286 \begin_inset space ~
7291 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7292 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7293 Here's an example of each:
7296 \begin_layout Right Address
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7306 \begin_inset Newline newline
7309 When is it? What is today?
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7316 \begin_inset space ~
7322 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7323 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7324 Here's an example of the
7331 \begin_layout Address
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Where do I send this
7337 \begin_inset Newline newline
7340 Your post office and country
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 As you can see, both
7351 \begin_inset space ~
7356 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7361 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7367 This makes sense, since
7375 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7376 Thus, you have to use
7383 arg "newline-insert newline"
7388 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7389 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7395 \begin_inset space ~
7400 ) to start a new line in an
7407 \begin_inset space ~
7415 \begin_layout Subsection
7419 \begin_layout Standard
7420 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7421 or list of references.
7422 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Standard
7444 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7445 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7446 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7447 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7461 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7462 The book document classes ignores the
7466 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7470 in a letter document class.
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7478 environment does several things for you.
7479 First, it puts the centered label
7480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7488 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7490 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7491 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7492 the subsequent text.
7493 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7494 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7499 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7503 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7504 The new paragraph will still be in the
7509 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7510 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 \begin_inset Float figure
7519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7521 \begin_inset Graphics
7522 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7535 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7557 We would love to demonstrate the
7561 environment, but since this document is in the
7562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7569 class, we can't do this.
7570 We inserted it therefore as figure
7571 \begin_inset space ~
7575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7577 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7582 If you have never heard of an
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7590 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7595 \begin_inset Index idx
7598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7607 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7619 environment is used to list references.
7620 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7621 only use it at the end of the document.
7633 \begin_layout Standard
7634 When you first open a
7638 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7654 depending on the document class.
7655 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7656 Each paragraph of the
7660 environment is a bibliography entry.
7665 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7666 Each new paragraph is still in the
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7675 by using a BibTeX database.
7676 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7677 phy handling, have a look at section
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7684 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7691 \begin_layout Subsection
7695 \begin_inset Index idx
7698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7699 Paragraph ! LyX code
7705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is another LyX extension.
7720 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7725 key as a fixed whitespace;
7729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7741 \begin_inset space ~
7746 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7751 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7752 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7755 arg "newline-insert newline"
7772 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7773 So, when you finish using the
7777 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7778 Also, you can nest the
7782 environment inside of others.
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7786 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7789 \begin_layout Itemize
7793 arg "newline-insert newline"
7796 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7801 \begin_inset space \space{}
7811 arg "newline-insert newline"
7817 \begin_layout Itemize
7821 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7837 \begin_layout Itemize
7838 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7839 You must put at least one
7843 in any line you want blank.
7844 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7847 \begin_layout Itemize
7848 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7852 since that will insert
7857 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7860 arg "self-insert \""
7866 \begin_layout Standard
7870 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7874 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7878 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7882 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7886 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7887 printf("Hello World!
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 This is just the standard
7902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 \begin_layout Standard
7918 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7919 rc-files, and so on.
7920 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7921 as if you used a typewriter.
7922 \begin_inset Index idx
7925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7926 Paragraph environments|)
7931 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7934 Program Code Listings
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7947 \begin_layout Section
7948 Nesting Environments
7949 \begin_inset Index idx
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7953 Nesting ! Environments
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7973 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7975 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7977 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7979 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7991 \begin_layout Enumerate
7995 \begin_layout Enumerate
8000 \begin_layout Enumerate
8004 \begin_layout Enumerate
8009 \begin_layout Enumerate
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8015 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8017 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8019 \begin_inset space ~
8023 \begin_inset space ~
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8042 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8045 arg "depth-increment"
8051 arg "depth-decrement"
8065 arg "depth-increment"
8071 arg "depth-decrement"
8075 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8076 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8080 \begin_layout Standard
8081 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8082 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8083 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8084 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8087 \begin_layout Standard
8088 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8089 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8091 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8094 \begin_layout Subsection
8095 What You Can and Can't Nest
8098 \begin_layout Standard
8099 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8100 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8103 \begin_layout Standard
8104 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8105 than a simple yes or no.
8106 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8109 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 Completely unnestable
8113 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8118 \begin_layout Itemize
8119 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8123 \begin_layout Standard
8124 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8125 environments have them:
8128 \begin_layout Description
8129 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8130 Can't nest into them.
8134 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 \begin_layout Description
8167 \begin_inset space ~
8170 Nestable You can nest them.
8171 You can nest other things into them.
8175 \begin_layout Itemize
8181 \begin_layout Itemize
8187 \begin_layout Itemize
8193 \begin_layout Itemize
8199 \begin_layout Itemize
8205 \begin_layout Itemize
8211 \begin_layout Itemize
8217 \begin_layout Itemize
8224 \begin_layout Description
8225 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8226 You can't nest anything into them.
8230 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 \begin_layout Itemize
8242 \begin_layout Itemize
8248 \begin_layout Itemize
8254 \begin_layout Itemize
8260 \begin_layout Itemize
8266 \begin_layout Itemize
8272 \begin_layout Itemize
8278 \begin_layout Itemize
8284 \begin_layout Itemize
8290 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8312 \begin_inset space ~
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 \begin_layout Standard
8326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8334 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8344 \begin_inset space ~
8347 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8348 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8349 nested section headings violate this.
8357 \begin_layout Subsection
8358 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8359 \begin_inset Index idx
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8363 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8371 \begin_layout Standard
8372 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8373 affected by nesting anyhow.
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8381 \begin_layout Itemize
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Standard
8391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8399 Figures and tables in
8403 are not affected by this.
8408 Have a look at section
8409 \begin_inset space ~
8413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8415 reference "sec:Floats"
8419 for more information about
8426 \begin_layout Standard
8427 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8428 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8433 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8441 of its own, it behaves just like a
8442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8449 paragraph environment.
8450 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 Here's an example with a table:
8458 \begin_layout Enumerate
8463 \begin_layout Enumerate
8464 This is (a) and it's nested.
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8475 \begin_layout Standard
8477 \begin_inset Tabular
8478 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8479 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8480 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8573 \begin_layout Enumerate
8575 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8579 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8584 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8587 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8593 This is (a) and it's nested.
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8604 \begin_layout Standard
8606 \begin_inset Tabular
8607 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8608 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8610 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8708 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8711 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8723 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8726 \begin_layout Enumerate
8731 \begin_layout Enumerate
8732 This is (a) and it's nested.
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8744 \begin_inset Tabular
8745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8746 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8854 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8860 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8861 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8865 \begin_layout Subsection
8866 Usage and General Features
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8879 is the innermost possible depth.
8880 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8883 \begin_layout Enumerate
8884 level #1 – outermost
8888 \begin_layout Enumerate
8893 \begin_layout Enumerate
8898 \begin_layout Enumerate
8903 \begin_layout Itemize
8908 \begin_layout Itemize
8917 \begin_layout Standard
8918 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8919 both of them in the example.
8920 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8930 For example, if we tried to nest another
8935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8942 , we would get errors.
8945 \begin_layout Subsection
8947 \begin_inset Index idx
8950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 \begin_layout Standard
8960 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8961 We have several examples of nested environments.
8962 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8967 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8970 \begin_layout Labeling
8971 \labelwidthstring MMM
8972 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8981 \begin_layout Labeling
8982 \labelwidthstring MMM
8983 #2-a This is level #2.
8984 We created it by using
8987 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8993 arg "depth-increment"
9000 \begin_layout Labeling
9001 \labelwidthstring MMM
9002 #3-a This is level #3.
9003 This time, we just enter
9010 arg "depth-increment"
9014 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9018 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9024 arg "depth-increment"
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9036 environment, nested inside of
9037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 So, it's at level #4.
9046 We did this by entering
9049 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9055 arg "depth-increment"
9058 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9063 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9084 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9087 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #4-a This is level #4.
9099 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9102 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9107 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9111 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9116 keep nesting things inside
9117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9128 \begin_layout Labeling
9129 \labelwidthstring MMM
9130 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9135 \begin_layout Labeling
9136 \labelwidthstring MMM
9137 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9138 and this is level #6.
9139 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9143 \begin_layout Labeling
9144 \labelwidthstring MMM
9145 #5-b Back to level #5.
9149 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9155 arg "depth-decrement"
9162 \begin_layout Labeling
9163 \labelwidthstring MMM
9167 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9173 arg "depth-decrement"
9176 , we're back at level #4.
9180 \begin_layout Labeling
9181 \labelwidthstring MMM
9182 #3-b Back to level #3.
9183 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9187 \begin_layout Labeling
9188 \labelwidthstring MMM
9189 #2-b Back to level #2.
9194 \begin_layout Labeling
9195 \labelwidthstring MMM
9196 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9197 After this sentence, we will enter
9201 and change the paragraph environment back to
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9209 We could have also used the
9225 environment in place of the
9230 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9234 Example 2: Inheritance
9237 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9238 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9241 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9250 arg "depth-increment"
9254 \begin_inset Newline newline
9257 which, we will change to the
9265 \begin_layout Enumerate
9270 environment, at level #2.
9273 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 Notice how the nested
9278 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9282 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 We ended this example by entering
9292 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9296 and reset the nesting depth by using
9299 arg "depth-decrement"
9305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9306 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9315 \begin_inset Argument 1
9318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9319 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9328 This is level #1, in an
9332 paragraph environment.
9333 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9348 arg "depth-increment"
9352 Now, what happens if we nest an
9356 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9357 label be? An asterisk?
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9372 So, its label is a bullet.
9373 (We got here by using
9376 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9382 arg "depth-increment"
9385 , then changing the environment to
9393 \begin_layout Itemize
9394 Here's level #4, produced using
9397 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9403 arg "depth-increment"
9407 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9412 \begin_layout Enumerate
9413 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9415 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9420 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9424 , because we are in the
9432 environment (that is, it is an
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9453 type of numbering does LyX use?
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9457 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9460 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9463 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9466 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 arg "depth-decrement"
9473 to decrease the depth after the next
9476 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9483 \begin_layout Enumerate
9485 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9489 \begin_layout Enumerate
9491 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9492 numeral as the label.Why?
9495 \begin_layout Enumerate
9496 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9505 Notice, however, that LyX
9509 reset the counter for the label.
9513 \begin_layout Enumerate
9517 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9523 arg "depth-decrement"
9526 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9527 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9528 into the twofold-nested
9536 \begin_layout Enumerate
9537 The same thing happens if we do another
9540 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9546 arg "depth-decrement"
9549 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9552 \begin_layout Standard
9553 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9558 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9572 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9578 The same rule applies for the
9582 environment, as well.
9585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9586 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9590 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9591 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9592 the same detail with how we did it.
9601 \begin_layout Standard
9609 arg "depth-increment"
9616 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9617 the example in parentheses someplace.
9618 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9619 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9620 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9624 \begin_layout Enumerate
9629 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9634 Now we will add verse.
9635 \begin_inset Newline newline
9638 It will get much worse.
9639 \begin_inset Newline newline
9649 arg "depth-increment"
9660 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9661 \begin_inset Newline newline
9664 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9665 \begin_inset Newline newline
9671 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9684 \begin_layout Standard
9685 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9691 \begin_layout Standard
9693 \begin_inset Tabular
9694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9695 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9696 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9786 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9796 arg "depth-increment"
9802 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9812 arg "depth-decrement"
9819 \begin_layout Enumerate
9824 : level #1) This is another item.
9825 Note that selecting a
9829 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9830 3 times to put the table inside the
9838 \begin_layout Quotation
9839 We're now ending the
9843 list and changing to
9848 We're still at level #1.
9849 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9850 The next set of paragraphs is a
9851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9858 We will nest both the
9865 \begin_inset space ~
9870 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9874 for the letter body.
9878 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9881 to preserve the depth.
9882 Remember that you need to use
9885 arg "newline-insert newline"
9888 to create multiple lines inside the
9895 \begin_inset space ~
9905 \begin_layout Right Address
9907 \begin_inset Newline newline
9910 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9911 \begin_inset Newline newline
9917 \begin_layout Address
9919 \begin_inset space ~
9925 \begin_layout Quotation
9926 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9930 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9931 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9932 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9933 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9934 as soon as possible.
9935 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9938 \begin_layout Quotation
9939 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9940 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9941 with your order, along with payment.
9944 \begin_layout Quotation
9945 We thank you again for your patience.
9948 \begin_layout Address
9950 \begin_inset Newline newline
9957 \begin_layout Quotation
9958 That ends that example!
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9963 just a few keystrokes.
9964 We could have easily nested an
9985 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9988 \begin_layout Section
9989 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9990 \begin_inset Index idx
9993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10002 \begin_layout Standard
10003 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10004 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10005 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10006 be broken at the end of a line.
10007 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10011 \begin_layout Subsection
10013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10015 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10020 \begin_inset Index idx
10023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10032 \begin_layout Standard
10033 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10034 line at that point.
10035 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10038 \begin_layout Quote
10039 Further documentation is given in section
10040 \begin_inset Newline newline
10044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10046 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10054 \begin_layout Standard
10055 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10070 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10079 A protected space is set with
10081 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10082 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10084 \begin_inset space ~
10092 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10098 \begin_layout Subsection
10100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10102 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10107 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Spacing ! Horizontal
10119 \begin_layout Standard
10120 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10122 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10123 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10127 The length units are listed in Appendix
10128 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10134 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10145 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10150 \begin_inset Index idx
10153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10154 Spaces ! Inter-word
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10163 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10164 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10165 at the ends of sentences.
10166 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10167 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10168 followed by a period; see section
10169 \begin_inset space ~
10173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10175 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10180 To insert a normal space, select
10182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10183 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10185 \begin_inset space ~
10193 arg "space-insert normal"
10199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10203 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10208 \begin_inset Index idx
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 \begin_layout Standard
10222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10229 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10238 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10239 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10240 inside abbreviations:
10243 \begin_layout Quote
10245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10249 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10252 \begin_layout Standard
10253 or between values and units.
10254 Compare for example this:
10255 \begin_inset Newline newline
10259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10263 \begin_inset Newline newline
10266 10 kg (normal space
10269 \begin_layout Standard
10270 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10272 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10273 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10275 \begin_inset space ~
10283 arg "space-insert thin"
10289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10293 \begin_layout Standard
10294 You can also insert the following space types:
10297 \begin_layout Description
10299 \begin_inset space ~
10303 \begin_inset space ~
10306 space A line with a
10307 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10311 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10315 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10318 negative thin space between the arrows.
10321 \begin_layout Description
10323 \begin_inset space ~
10327 \begin_inset space ~
10330 space A line with a
10331 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10335 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10339 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10342 negative medium space between the arrows.
10345 \begin_layout Description
10347 \begin_inset space ~
10351 \begin_inset space ~
10354 space A line with a
10355 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10359 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10363 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10366 negative thick space between the arrows.
10369 \begin_layout Description
10371 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10379 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10383 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10387 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10398 em) space between the arrows.
10401 \begin_layout Description
10403 \begin_inset space ~
10407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10411 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10415 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10419 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10423 \begin_inset space ~
10427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10430 em) space between the arrows.
10433 \begin_layout Description
10435 \begin_inset space ~
10439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10443 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10447 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10451 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10455 \begin_inset space ~
10459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10462 em) space between the arrows.
10465 \begin_layout Description
10467 \begin_inset space ~
10471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10475 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10480 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 cm space between the arrows.
10490 \begin_layout Standard
10492 \begin_inset space ~
10496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10498 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10502 lists the different space sizes.
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 \begin_inset Float table
10511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10512 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10517 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10521 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10531 \begin_inset Tabular
10532 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10533 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10651 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10810 \begin_inset Index idx
10813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10822 \begin_layout Standard
10823 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10824 in a uniform fashion.
10825 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10826 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10827 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10828 equally between themselves.
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10835 \begin_layout Quote
10837 This is on the left side
10838 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10841 This is on the right
10844 \begin_layout Quote
10847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10851 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10857 \begin_layout Quote
10860 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10864 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10868 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10874 \begin_layout Standard
10875 That was an example in the
10881 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10885 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10892 is one in a standard paragraph.
10893 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10897 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10904 \begin_inset space ~
10909 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10914 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10924 \begin_layout Standard
10926 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10930 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_layout Standard
10938 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10942 \begin_inset space ~
10948 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10954 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_layout Standard
10962 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10966 \begin_inset space ~
10972 \begin_layout Standard
10974 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_layout Standard
10985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10997 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10998 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10999 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11003 option in the space dialog.
11011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11015 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11020 \begin_inset Index idx
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 \begin_layout Standard
11033 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11034 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11037 \begin_layout Standard
11038 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11041 What is correct English?:
11042 \begin_inset Newline newline
11046 \begin_inset Newline newline
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11053 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11054 \begin_inset Newline newline
11058 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11069 \begin_inset Newline newline
11073 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11092 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11097 \begin_inset space ~
11101 \begin_inset space ~
11105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11109 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11111 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11112 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11116 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11122 \begin_inset space ~
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11133 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11142 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11143 That is why it is named
11144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11152 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11153 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11157 \begin_layout Subsection
11159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11161 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11166 \begin_inset Index idx
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 \begin_layout Standard
11179 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11181 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11182 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11190 There you find the following sizes:
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11206 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11211 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11213 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11214 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11216 \begin_inset space ~
11222 \begin_inset Index idx
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 Document ! Settings
11231 for the paragraph separation.
11232 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11249 \begin_inset Index idx
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11259 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11264 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11265 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11274 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 s are described in section
11284 \begin_inset space ~
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11290 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11299 If there are several
11303 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11304 You can therefore use
11308 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11316 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11317 \begin_inset space ~
11321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11323 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11330 \begin_layout Standard
11331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11342 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11354 \begin_layout Subsection
11355 Paragraph Alignment
11356 \begin_inset Index idx
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 Paragraph ! Alignment
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11374 dialog (toolbar button
11377 arg "layout-paragraph"
11381 There are five possibilities:
11384 \begin_layout Itemize
11392 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11398 \begin_layout Itemize
11406 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11412 \begin_layout Itemize
11420 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11426 \begin_layout Itemize
11434 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11440 \begin_layout Itemize
11448 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11454 \begin_layout Standard
11455 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11456 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11457 the left and right margins.
11458 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11463 This paragraph is right aligned,
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11468 this one is centered,
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11473 this one is left aligned.
11476 \begin_layout Subsection
11478 \begin_inset Index idx
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 Page breaks ! Forced
11488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11490 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11498 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11499 can force a page break where you want one.
11500 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11501 Only if you use a lot of
11505 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11509 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11510 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11514 have to change the page breaking.
11517 \begin_layout Standard
11518 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11520 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11522 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11523 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11533 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11534 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11536 \begin_inset space ~
11541 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11543 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11544 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11549 at the top of a page.
11550 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11551 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11552 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11553 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11557 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11561 to learn more about
11568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11572 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11577 \begin_inset Index idx
11580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11581 Page breaks ! Clear
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11590 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11591 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11592 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11593 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11594 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11597 \begin_layout Standard
11598 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11600 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11601 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11603 \begin_inset space ~
11609 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11612 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11618 \begin_inset space ~
11623 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11624 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11627 \begin_layout Subsection
11629 \begin_inset Index idx
11632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11641 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11648 \begin_layout Standard
11649 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11651 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11653 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11654 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11660 \begin_inset space ~
11668 arg "newline-insert newline"
11672 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11675 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11689 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11692 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11694 This is useful to avoid
11695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11702 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11705 \begin_layout Standard
11706 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11707 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11708 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11709 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11716 reference "sec:Quote"
11721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11723 reference "sec:Verse"
11728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11730 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11737 \begin_layout Subsection
11739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11741 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11746 \begin_inset Index idx
11749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 \begin_layout Standard
11760 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11775 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11776 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11778 \begin_inset space ~
11783 you can insert horizontal lines.
11784 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11785 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11786 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11791 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11802 \begin_layout Section
11803 Characters and Symbols
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11807 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11808 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11809 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11817 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11821 for information on how this is done.
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11825 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11830 dialog via the menu
11832 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11833 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11839 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11849 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11850 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11858 \begin_layout Section
11859 Fonts and Text Styles
11860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11862 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11869 \begin_layout Subsection
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11884 There are two types of fonts:
11887 \begin_layout Description
11889 \begin_inset space ~
11893 \begin_inset Index idx
11896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11902 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11907 characters) in the font.
11908 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11909 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11910 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11911 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11912 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11913 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11914 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11915 \begin_inset Newline newline
11918 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11919 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11920 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11921 sizes than at small ones.
11922 \begin_inset Newline newline
11936 \begin_inset space ~
11944 \begin_layout Description
11946 \begin_inset space ~
11950 \begin_inset Index idx
11953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11960 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11961 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11962 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11963 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11964 image manipulation program.
11965 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11966 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11967 \begin_inset space ~
11970 pixels high up to 34
11971 \begin_inset space ~
11974 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11975 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11976 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11978 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11979 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11980 \begin_inset Newline newline
11983 Bitmap fonts are named
11986 \begin_inset space ~
11991 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11994 \begin_layout Standard
11995 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11996 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11997 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11998 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11999 use scalable fonts.
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12003 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12006 \begin_layout Standard
12007 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12008 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12009 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12010 font to emphasize text, you use an
12011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12019 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12020 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12024 \begin_layout Subsection
12026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12028 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12035 \begin_layout Standard
12036 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12037 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12038 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12040 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12041 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12042 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12043 to a word processor.
12044 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12045 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12046 across different machines.
12047 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12048 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12050 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12058 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12063 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12064 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12067 \begin_layout Standard
12068 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12069 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12071 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12072 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12073 that is installed on your system.
12074 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12086 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12087 es; so you might have to experiment.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12104 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12105 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12113 \begin_layout Subsection
12114 Document Font and Font size
12115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12117 name "sub:Document-Font"
12122 \begin_inset Index idx
12125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12132 \begin_inset Index idx
12135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12144 \begin_layout Standard
12145 You can set the document fonts in the
12147 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12151 \begin_inset Index idx
12154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12155 Document ! Settings
12165 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12166 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12169 \begin_inset space ~
12178 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12183 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12202 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12203 This requires that you use
12209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12248 as the output format, i.
12249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12253 \begin_inset space \space{}
12256 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12263 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12268 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12269 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12274 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12275 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12276 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12278 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12281 \begin_layout Standard
12282 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12287 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12292 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12293 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12300 \begin_inset space ~
12306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12319 European Computer Modern
12322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12329 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12341 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12342 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12347 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12350 \begin_inset space ~
12355 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12361 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12362 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12365 \begin_layout Itemize
12369 \begin_inset space ~
12374 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12392 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12396 as the default font.
12397 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12398 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12415 One difference is improved kerning.
12423 \begin_layout Itemize
12427 \begin_inset space ~
12431 \begin_inset space ~
12436 fonts in (the rare) case that
12439 \begin_inset space ~
12444 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12459 Virtual means that it
12460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12471 -glyphs from other fonts.
12472 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12494 Loading the LaTeX-package
12499 \begin_inset Index idx
12502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12508 with the document preamble line
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12517 \begin_inset Newline newline
12522 will fix the guillemet problem.
12527 and that accented characters are not
12531 glyph, but built of
12535 characters, the accent and the letter.
12536 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12542 If you search for example for the French word
12543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12550 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12559 and not for the glyph
12560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12574 \begin_layout Itemize
12575 If you do not like the look of
12583 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12588 \begin_inset space ~
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12604 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12605 \begin_inset space ~
12608 serif and typewriter fonts,
12612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12613 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12620 \begin_inset space ~
12629 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12634 \begin_inset space \space{}
12642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12646 \begin_inset space \space{}
12652 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12670 but you can also select your own.
12671 \begin_inset Newline newline
12674 The differences between roman,
12677 \begin_inset space ~
12686 fonts are explained in section
12687 \begin_inset space ~
12691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12693 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12698 \begin_inset Newline newline
12704 \begin_inset space ~
12709 was originally designed for newspapers.
12710 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12711 into the small newspaper columns.
12715 \begin_inset space ~
12720 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12723 \begin_layout Standard
12724 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12737 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12742 depends on the class you are using.
12743 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 Note that the font size is the
12752 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12753 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12754 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12757 \begin_inset space ~
12763 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12764 \begin_inset space ~
12768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12770 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12786 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12788 \begin_inset space ~
12791 serif or typewriter.
12796 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12806 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12809 \begin_layout Standard
12818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12833 \begin_inset Index idx
12836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12837 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12849 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12854 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12855 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12862 \begin_layout Standard
12863 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12865 Use Old Style Figures
12869 Use True Small Caps
12872 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12875 Use Old Style Figures
12877 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12879 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12887 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12891 Use True Small Caps
12893 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12894 of scaled capitals.
12895 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12896 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12899 \begin_layout Standard
12904 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12905 a font to display the script characters.
12909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12910 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12915 \begin_inset Index idx
12918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12919 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12924 So this has no effect for the document language
12938 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12942 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12950 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12954 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12955 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12956 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12958 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12961 dialog, see section
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12968 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12980 \begin_layout Subsection
12984 \begin_layout Standard
12985 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
12987 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
12988 choose a math font in the dialog
12990 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12994 \begin_inset Index idx
12997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12998 Document ! Settings
13004 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13005 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13006 default font family
13007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13023 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13024 the document font is available.
13027 \begin_layout Standard
13028 Note that the math font will not be used for
13032 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13038 or by the insertion of the command
13045 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13050 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13051 while the math characters do not.
13053 \begin_inset space ~
13056 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13072 in the document font settings.
13075 \begin_layout Standard
13076 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13077 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13093 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13113 \begin_layout Subsection
13114 Using Different Character Styles
13115 \begin_inset Index idx
13118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13125 \begin_inset Index idx
13128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13139 certain paragraph environments.
13140 LyX supports two character styles,
13149 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13158 style, do one of the following:
13161 \begin_layout Itemize
13162 click on the toolbar button
13171 \begin_layout Itemize
13172 use the key binding
13181 \begin_layout Standard
13182 These commands are all toggles.
13187 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13190 \begin_layout Standard
13191 One typically uses the
13195 style for proper names.
13197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13204 is the original author of LyX.
13205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13211 \begin_layout Standard
13212 A more widely used character style is the
13217 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13224 \begin_layout Itemize
13225 clicking on the toolbar button
13234 \begin_layout Itemize
13235 using the keybindings
13244 \begin_layout Standard
13249 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13250 es use a different font.
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13254 We've been using the
13258 style all over the place in this document.
13259 Here's one more example:
13262 \begin_layout Quotation
13265 Do not overuse character styles!
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13270 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13271 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13272 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13276 \begin_layout Standard
13277 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13285 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13287 \begin_inset space ~
13290 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13296 arg "dialog-show character"
13302 \begin_layout Subsection
13303 Fine-Tuning with the
13308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13310 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13315 \begin_inset Index idx
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13327 \begin_layout Standard
13328 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13329 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13330 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13331 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13332 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13333 from ordinary dialog.
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13338 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13339 \begin_inset Newline newline
13342 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13343 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13347 To use custom character styles, open the
13349 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13354 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13357 dialog or press the toolbar button
13360 arg "dialog-show character"
13364 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13365 font property that you can choose.
13366 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13374 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13379 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13380 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13381 environments all at once.
13384 \begin_layout Standard
13385 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13388 \begin_inset space ~
13400 \begin_layout Labeling
13401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13415 The possible options are:
13419 \begin_layout Labeling
13420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13425 This is the Roman font family.
13426 Normally a serif font.
13427 It's also the default family.
13437 \begin_layout Labeling
13438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13442 \begin_inset space ~
13449 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13461 \begin_layout Labeling
13462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13469 This is the Typewriter font family.
13475 arg "font-typewriter"
13484 \begin_layout Labeling
13485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13490 This corresponds to the print weight.
13495 \begin_layout Labeling
13496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13501 This is the Medium font series.
13502 It's also the default series.
13505 \begin_layout Labeling
13506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13513 This is the Bold font series.
13526 \begin_layout Labeling
13527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13532 As the name implies.
13537 \begin_layout Labeling
13538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13543 This is the Upright font shape.
13544 It's also the default shape.
13547 \begin_layout Labeling
13548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13562 s the Italic font shape
13568 \begin_layout Labeling
13569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13576 This is the Slanted font shape
13578 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13581 \begin_layout Labeling
13582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13586 \begin_inset space ~
13593 This is the Small caps font shape
13600 \begin_layout Labeling
13601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13606 Alters the text color.
13607 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13616 , which means that the document default color set in
13618 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13619 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13625 \begin_inset space ~
13630 is used, you can choose between
13663 \begin_inset Index idx
13666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13675 \begin_layout Labeling
13676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13681 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13682 the language of the document.
13683 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13685 \begin_inset Newline newline
13688 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13689 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13690 When using the spell checking (see section
13691 \begin_inset space ~
13695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13697 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13701 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13704 \begin_layout Labeling
13705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13710 Alters the size of the font.
13711 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13712 proportional to the document font size.
13713 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13714 what you want to do.
13719 \begin_layout Labeling
13720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13741 arg "font-size tiny"
13747 \begin_layout Labeling
13748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13769 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13775 \begin_layout Labeling
13776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13797 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13803 \begin_layout Labeling
13804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13825 arg "font-size small"
13831 \begin_layout Labeling
13832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13846 It's also the default size.
13850 arg "font-size normal"
13856 \begin_layout Labeling
13857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13878 arg "font-size large"
13884 \begin_layout Labeling
13885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13906 arg "font-size larger"
13912 \begin_layout Labeling
13913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13934 arg "font-size largest"
13940 \begin_layout Labeling
13941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13962 arg "font-size huge"
13968 \begin_layout Labeling
13969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13990 arg "font-size giant"
13996 \begin_layout Labeling
13997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14002 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14022 arg "font-size increase"
14028 \begin_layout Labeling
14029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14054 arg "font-size decrease"
14061 \begin_layout Standard
14066 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14067 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14068 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14069 — use those instead.
14070 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14073 \begin_layout Labeling
14074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14079 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14084 \begin_layout Labeling
14085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14092 This is text with emphasize on
14095 This might seem like the same as
14099 , but it is actually a bit different.
14105 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14107 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14110 \begin_layout Labeling
14111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 This is text with Underbar on.
14124 arg "font-underline"
14130 \begin_inset Newline newline
14135 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14136 when you could not change fonts.
14137 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14138 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14142 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14145 \begin_layout Labeling
14146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 \begin_inset space ~
14157 This is text with Double underbar on.
14163 arg "font-underunderline"
14167 \begin_inset Newline newline
14170 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14171 about double underbar.
14174 \begin_layout Labeling
14175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14179 \begin_inset space ~
14186 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14192 arg "font-underwave"
14196 \begin_inset Newline newline
14199 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14200 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14203 \begin_layout Labeling
14204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14211 This is text with Strikeout on.
14217 arg "font-strikeout"
14221 \begin_inset Newline newline
14224 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14225 changed in the meantime.
14228 \begin_layout Labeling
14229 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14236 This is text with Noun on.
14243 , this is a logical attribute.
14244 Normally it's equivalent to
14247 \begin_inset space ~
14256 \begin_layout Standard
14257 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14258 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14260 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14262 \begin_inset space ~
14265 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14271 arg "dialog-show character"
14274 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14275 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14278 arg "textstyle-apply"
14282 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14286 \begin_layout Standard
14287 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14294 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14295 (suppose you just set the shape to
14296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14314 \begin_inset space ~
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14327 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14335 \begin_inset space ~
14347 \begin_layout Itemize
14353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14360 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14378 \begin_inset Newline newline
14382 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14396 \begin_inset Note Note
14399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14400 For more on phantoms see section
14401 \begin_inset space ~
14405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14407 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14417 \begin_inset Newline newline
14423 \begin_layout Itemize
14428 fonts use characters with serifs.
14429 These are the small
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14437 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14438 The following example shows the difference:
14439 \begin_inset Newline newline
14443 \begin_inset Newline newline
14448 text without serifs
14451 \begin_inset Newline newline
14454 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14455 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14462 \begin_layout Itemize
14467 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14468 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14469 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14472 \begin_layout Standard
14473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14480 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14481 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14484 \begin_inset space ~
14489 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14490 the property to be removed.
14491 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14492 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14493 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14511 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14512 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14529 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14540 If you, for example, set
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 \begin_inset space ~
14564 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14573 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14576 \begin_layout Standard
14577 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14578 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14581 \begin_layout Section
14582 Printing and Previewing
14585 \begin_layout Subsection
14589 \begin_layout Standard
14590 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14591 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14592 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14593 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14594 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14596 Additional Features
14601 \begin_layout Standard
14602 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14603 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14604 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14605 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14606 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14607 This happens in two stages:
14610 \begin_layout Enumerate
14611 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14612 generating a file with the extension,
14613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14627 \begin_layout Enumerate
14628 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14632 file to produce printable output.
14635 \begin_layout Subsection
14636 Output file formats
14637 \begin_inset Index idx
14640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14649 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14656 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14657 Simple text (ASCII)
14658 \begin_inset Index idx
14661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14662 File formats ! ASCII
14670 \begin_layout Standard
14671 This file type has the extension
14672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14684 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14688 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14695 \begin_layout Standard
14696 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14698 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14699 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14701 \begin_inset space ~
14707 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14708 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14715 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14720 If your document includes such material, use
14722 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14723 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14725 \begin_inset space ~
14729 \begin_inset space ~
14733 \begin_inset space ~
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14751 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14752 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14757 \begin_inset Index idx
14760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14761 File formats ! LaTeX
14769 \begin_layout Standard
14770 This file type has the extension
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14782 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14784 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14785 it manually with console commands.
14786 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14787 you view or export your document.
14790 \begin_layout Standard
14791 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14793 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14794 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14809 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14810 \begin_inset space ~
14814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14816 reference "sub:Export"
14823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14825 \begin_inset Index idx
14828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14837 \begin_layout Standard
14838 This file type has the extension
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14859 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14860 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14861 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14865 \begin_layout Standard
14866 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14867 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14868 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14869 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14870 when you view the DVI.
14871 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14875 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14877 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14878 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14883 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14884 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14903 The latter option uses the program
14912 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14913 font access (see section
14914 \begin_inset space ~
14918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14920 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14925 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14926 standard TeX processor.
14929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14931 \begin_inset Index idx
14934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14935 File formats ! PostScript
14943 \begin_layout Standard
14944 This file type has the extension
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 PostScript was developed by the company
14961 as a printer language.
14962 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14964 PostScript can be seen as a
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14968 programming language
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14983 \begin_inset Index idx
14986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14997 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15000 \begin_layout Standard
15001 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15005 Encapsulated PostScript
15006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15009 (EPS, file extension
15010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15022 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15023 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15024 If, for example, you have 50
15025 \begin_inset space ~
15028 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15029 \begin_inset space ~
15032 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15033 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15034 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15035 EPS to avoid this problem.
15038 \begin_layout Standard
15039 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15041 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15042 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15050 \begin_inset Index idx
15053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15060 \begin_inset Index idx
15063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15072 \begin_layout Standard
15073 This file type has the extension
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15090 Portable Document Format
15091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15098 was derived from PostScript.
15099 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15109 looks exactly the same.
15112 \begin_layout Standard
15113 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15117 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15121 (JPG, file extension
15122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 Portable Network Graphics
15150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15153 (PNG, file extension
15154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15166 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15167 background to one of these formats.
15168 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15169 will slow down your workflow.
15170 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15173 \begin_layout Standard
15174 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15176 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15182 \begin_layout Description
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15187 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15191 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15194 \begin_layout Description
15196 \begin_inset space ~
15203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15210 X) This uses the program
15214 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15219 is a new engine, derived from
15223 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15224 access (see section
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15231 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15236 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15237 standard TeX processor.
15240 \begin_layout Description
15242 \begin_inset space ~
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 X) This uses the program
15260 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15265 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15266 font access (see section
15267 \begin_inset space ~
15271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15273 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15278 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15279 vertically written Japanese.
15282 \begin_layout Description
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15287 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15291 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15295 \begin_layout Description
15297 \begin_inset space ~
15300 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15304 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15305 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15309 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15310 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15313 \begin_layout Standard
15317 \begin_inset space ~
15326 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15327 works without problems.
15328 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15329 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15352 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15368 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 FileFormats ! XHTML
15388 \begin_inset Index idx
15391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15400 \begin_layout Standard
15401 This file type has the extension
15402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15414 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15415 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15416 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15417 suitable for the purpose.
15418 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15420 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15421 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15424 between different formats, which are described in section
15426 Math Output in XHTML
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15439 \begin_layout Standard
15440 XHTML output remains
15441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15448 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15451 LyX and the World Wide Web
15455 Additional Features
15457 manual, for more information.
15460 \begin_layout Standard
15461 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15463 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15464 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15470 \begin_layout Subsection
15472 \begin_inset Index idx
15475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 \begin_layout Standard
15485 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15486 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15495 or use the toolbar button
15502 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15503 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15510 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15514 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15522 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15527 Further output formats can be selected via
15529 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15530 View (Other Formats)
15532 or the toolbar button
15533 \begin_inset Graphics
15534 filename ../images/view-others.png
15536 groupId toolbarbuttons
15543 \begin_layout Standard
15544 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15545 viewer window using the menu
15547 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15552 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15553 Update (Other Formats)
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15559 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15561 To have a real output, export your document.
15564 \begin_layout Subsection
15565 Printing the File from within LyX
15566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15568 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15575 \begin_layout Standard
15576 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15577 it directly from within LyX.
15578 To print a file, select the menu
15580 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15586 arg "dialog-show print"
15589 ) or click on the toolbar button
15592 arg "dialog-show print"
15596 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15597 This file is then processed by the program
15601 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15606 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 You can set the following print parameters in the
15613 \begin_inset space ~
15621 \begin_layout Labeling
15622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15627 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15632 Note that this printer name is for the program
15641 has to be configured for this printer name.
15642 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15643 \begin_inset space ~
15647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15649 reference "sub:Printer"
15658 The printer should understand PostScript.
15661 \begin_layout Labeling
15662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15667 The name of a file to print to.
15668 The output will be a PostScript file.
15669 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15673 \begin_layout Standard
15674 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15675 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15676 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15677 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15678 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15679 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15680 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15683 \begin_layout Section
15684 A few Words about Typography
15685 \begin_inset Index idx
15688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15697 \begin_layout Subsection
15698 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15699 \begin_inset Index idx
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15709 \begin_inset Index idx
15712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15721 \begin_layout Standard
15723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15734 character comes in four lengths: the
15746 , and the minus sign:
15747 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15753 \begin_layout Standard
15754 \begin_inset Tabular
15755 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15756 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15757 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15758 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15760 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15789 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15854 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15859 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15866 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15917 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15951 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15957 \begin_layout Standard
15958 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 character multiple times in a row.
15971 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15972 the final output, but not in LyX.
15974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16004 \begin_layout Standard
16005 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16006 math mode and has a length of its own.
16007 Here are some examples:
16010 \begin_layout Enumerate
16011 line- and page-breaks
16012 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16022 \begin_layout Enumerate
16024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16034 \begin_layout Enumerate
16035 Oh — there's a dash.
16036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16046 \begin_layout Enumerate
16047 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16051 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16061 \begin_layout Subsection
16063 \begin_inset Index idx
16066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16075 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16084 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16089 \begin_inset Index idx
16092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16098 following the rules of the document language.
16101 \begin_layout Standard
16102 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16107 font and with unusual constructs, like
16108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16116 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16118 This is done with the menu
16120 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16121 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16129 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16130 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16133 \begin_layout Standard
16134 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16135 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16153 as a hyphenation possibility.
16154 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16155 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16156 as described in section
16157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16160 Prevent Hyphenation
16161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16167 \begin_inset space ~
16175 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 \begin_inset Index idx
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16190 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16193 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16202 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16203 LaTeX then adds the
16204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16207 appropriate amount of space.
16208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16213 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16214 gets after another word.
16217 \begin_layout Standard
16218 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16219 not work in all cases.
16221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16232 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16233 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16236 \begin_layout Standard
16237 Here are some examples of
16241 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16244 \begin_layout Itemize
16249 \begin_layout Itemize
16254 \begin_layout Standard
16255 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16258 \begin_layout Itemize
16260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16264 this is too much space!
16267 \begin_layout Itemize
16272 \begin_layout Standard
16273 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16276 \begin_layout Standard
16277 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16280 \begin_layout Enumerate
16284 \begin_inset space ~
16289 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16290 \begin_inset space ~
16294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16296 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16301 \begin_inset Index idx
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16305 Spaces ! inter-word
16313 \begin_layout Enumerate
16317 \begin_inset space ~
16322 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16323 \begin_inset space ~
16327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16329 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16334 \begin_inset Index idx
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16346 \begin_layout Enumerate
16350 \begin_inset space ~
16354 \begin_inset space ~
16358 \begin_inset space ~
16365 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16367 \begin_inset space ~
16372 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16373 This function is also bound to
16376 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16382 \begin_layout Standard
16383 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16386 \begin_layout Itemize
16388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16392 \begin_inset space \space{}
16395 this is too much space!
16398 \begin_layout Itemize
16399 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16403 \begin_layout Standard
16404 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16405 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16406 will take care of this.
16409 \begin_layout Standard
16410 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16414 \begin_inset space ~
16419 feature described in the section
16425 Additional Features
16430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16432 \begin_inset Index idx
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 Typography ! Quotes
16442 \begin_inset Index idx
16445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16476 \begin_layout Standard
16477 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16478 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16479 and use a closing quote at the end.
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 The keyboard character,
16493 , generates this automatically.
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16497 You can specify what character the
16501 key produces using the submenu
16507 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16511 \begin_inset Index idx
16514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16515 Document ! Settings
16525 There are six choices:
16528 \begin_layout Labeling
16529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16552 \begin_layout Labeling
16553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16556 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16560 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16566 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16570 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16576 \begin_layout Labeling
16577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16580 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16584 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16590 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16594 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16600 \begin_layout Labeling
16601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16604 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16608 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16614 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16624 \begin_layout Labeling
16625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16628 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16632 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16638 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16642 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16648 \begin_layout Labeling
16649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16652 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16656 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16662 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16666 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16673 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16676 arg "quote-insert single"
16682 \begin_layout Subsection
16684 \begin_inset Index idx
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16688 Typography ! Ligatures
16694 \begin_inset Index idx
16697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16728 name "sub:Ligatures"
16735 \begin_layout Standard
16736 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16737 print them as single characters.
16738 These groups are known as
16743 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16745 Here are the standard ligatures:
16748 \begin_layout Itemize
16752 \begin_layout Itemize
16756 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16774 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16782 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16798 To break a ligature, use
16800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16801 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16803 \begin_inset space ~
16810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16821 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16838 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16846 \begin_layout Subsection
16848 \begin_inset Index idx
16851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16860 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16867 \begin_layout Standard
16868 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16869 characters in different sizes and positions.
16870 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16871 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16891 \begin_inset Note Note
16894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16895 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16896 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16901 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16902 following proper names:
16905 \begin_layout Description
16906 LyX The name of the game, write
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16928 \begin_layout Description
16929 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16951 \begin_layout Description
16952 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16974 \begin_layout Description
16975 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16997 \begin_layout Standard
16998 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17003 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17011 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17012 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17013 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17016 : The actual version is
17017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17024 , the previous one was
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17035 \begin_layout Standard
17036 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17037 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17038 In LyX this will look like
17039 \begin_inset Graphics
17040 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17046 \begin_inset Newline newline
17049 For more about TeX Code, see section
17050 \begin_inset space ~
17054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17056 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17063 \begin_layout Subsection
17065 \begin_inset Index idx
17068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17077 \begin_layout Standard
17078 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17079 space between two words.
17080 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 for units use the menu
17092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17093 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17095 \begin_inset space ~
17103 arg "space-insert thin"
17109 \begin_layout Standard
17110 Here is an example to show the differences:
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 \begin_inset Tabular
17115 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17116 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17117 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17118 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17125 \begin_inset space ~
17129 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17141 space between number and unit
17148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17157 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17169 half space between number and unit
17182 \begin_layout Subsection
17184 \begin_inset Index idx
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17188 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17196 \begin_layout Standard
17197 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17199 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17200 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17201 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17202 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17203 These bits of text became known as
17214 \begin_layout Standard
17215 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17216 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17217 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17218 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17219 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17220 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17221 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17222 \begin_inset Newline newline
17230 \begin_inset Newline newline
17238 \begin_inset Newline newline
17241 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17242 Some LaTeX books (such as
17243 \begin_inset space ~
17247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17249 key "latexcompanion"
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17264 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17268 \begin_layout Chapter
17269 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17272 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17279 \begin_layout Standard
17280 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17283 \begin_inset space ~
17289 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17292 \begin_layout Section
17294 \begin_inset Index idx
17297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17313 \begin_layout Standard
17314 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17317 \begin_layout Description
17319 \begin_inset space ~
17322 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17323 \begin_inset Newline newline
17327 \begin_inset Note Note
17330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17331 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17339 \begin_layout Description
17340 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17341 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17343 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17344 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17357 \begin_inset space ~
17363 \begin_inset Newline newline
17367 \begin_inset Note Comment
17370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17371 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17379 \begin_layout Description
17381 \begin_inset space ~
17384 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17385 set in the document settings under
17387 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17389 \begin_inset space ~
17395 \begin_inset Newline newline
17399 \begin_inset Newline newline
17403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17412 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17413 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17418 of a comment that appears in the output.
17424 \begin_inset Newline newline
17428 \begin_inset Newline newline
17431 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17434 \begin_layout Standard
17435 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17443 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17447 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17450 \begin_layout Section
17452 \begin_inset Index idx
17455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17464 name "sec:Footnotes"
17471 \begin_layout Standard
17472 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17478 or the toolbar button
17481 arg "footnote-insert"
17493 \begin_inset Graphics
17494 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17503 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17532 label, the box will
17536 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17537 Clicking on the box label again will close
17550 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17551 and click on the footnote
17566 \begin_layout Standard
17567 Here is an example footnote:
17575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17576 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17586 position where the footnote box is placed.
17587 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17588 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17589 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17590 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17595 ey are described in the
17598 \begin_inset space ~
17606 \begin_layout Section
17608 \begin_inset Index idx
17611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17620 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17627 \begin_layout Standard
17628 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17629 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17631 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17633 \begin_inset space ~
17638 or the toolbar button
17641 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17667 appearing within your text.
17668 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17677 \begin_layout Standard
17678 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17682 \begin_inset Marginal
17685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 This is a marginal note.
17695 \begin_layout Standard
17696 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17697 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17698 pages, right on odd pages.
17701 \begin_layout Standard
17702 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17713 \begin_inset space ~
17721 \begin_layout Section
17722 Graphics and Images
17723 \begin_inset Index idx
17726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17733 \begin_inset Index idx
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17745 name "sec:Graphics"
17752 \begin_layout Standard
17753 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17754 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17757 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17762 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17766 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17769 \begin_layout Standard
17770 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17775 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17776 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17778 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17785 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17792 \begin_layout Standard
17797 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17798 of the image in the output.
17799 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17803 \begin_inset space ~
17807 \begin_inset space ~
17816 \begin_inset space ~
17820 \begin_inset space ~
17824 \begin_inset space ~
17829 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17830 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17838 \begin_layout Standard
17845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17853 \begin_inset space ~
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17874 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17878 \begin_inset space ~
17883 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17884 with the image size is printed.
17888 \begin_inset space ~
17892 \begin_inset space ~
17896 \begin_inset space ~
17901 is explained in the
17904 \begin_inset space ~
17916 \begin_layout Standard
17917 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17918 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17920 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17923 \begin_layout Standard
17925 \begin_inset Graphics
17926 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17935 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17936 the image into a float, see section
17937 \begin_inset space ~
17941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17943 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17950 \begin_layout Subsection
17952 \begin_inset Index idx
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17964 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17971 \begin_layout Standard
17972 You can insert images in any known file format.
17973 But as we explained in section
17974 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17980 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17984 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17985 LyX therefore uses the program
17989 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17990 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17991 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17998 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18005 \begin_layout Standard
18006 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18009 \begin_layout Description
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18014 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18015 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18016 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18020 Graphics Interchange Format
18021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18024 (GIF, file extension
18025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18037 \begin_inset Index idx
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18072 Portable Network Graphics
18073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18076 (PNG, file extension
18077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 \begin_inset Index idx
18092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18124 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18128 (JPG, file extension
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18153 \begin_inset Index idx
18156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18187 \begin_layout Description
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18192 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18194 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18195 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18196 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18197 \begin_inset Newline newline
18200 Scalable image formats can be
18201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18204 Scalable Vector Graphics
18205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18208 (SVG, file extension
18209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18221 \begin_inset Index idx
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18256 Encapsulated PostScript
18257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18260 (EPS, file extension
18261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18273 \begin_inset Index idx
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18308 Portable Document Format
18309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18312 (PDF, file extension
18313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 \begin_inset Index idx
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18343 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18344 result will not be scalable.
18345 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18351 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18359 \begin_layout Standard
18360 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18367 \begin_layout Subsection
18368 Grouping of Image Settings
18369 \begin_inset Index idx
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18373 Images ! Settings grouping
18381 \begin_layout Standard
18382 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18384 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18385 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18387 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18388 need to manually change each of them.
18392 \begin_layout Standard
18393 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18396 \begin_inset space ~
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 \begin_inset space ~
18427 \begin_inset space ~
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18444 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18445 and checking the name of the desired group.
18448 \begin_layout Section
18450 \begin_inset Index idx
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18469 \begin_layout Standard
18470 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18473 arg "tabular-insert"
18478 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18482 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18483 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18484 from the rest of the table.
18485 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18486 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18488 Here is an example table:
18491 \begin_layout Standard
18493 \begin_inset Tabular
18494 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18495 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 \begin_layout Standard
18704 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18707 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18711 This brings up the table dialog.
18712 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18713 cursor is placed currently.
18714 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18715 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18716 done on all of your selection.
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18720 In addition to the table dialog, the
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18728 helps you in setting table properties.
18729 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18741 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18742 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18743 current cell respectively.
18744 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18746 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18747 of text, see section
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18754 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18761 \begin_layout Standard
18762 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18763 using the check box
18772 This will merge the cells to
18776 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18777 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18778 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18779 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18780 in the last row without the upper border:
18783 \begin_layout Standard
18785 \begin_inset Tabular
18786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18787 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18789 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18791 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18922 \begin_layout Standard
18923 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18924 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18925 explained in the chapter
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18938 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18942 degrees counterclockwise.
18943 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18946 \begin_layout Standard
18947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18955 Most DVI-viewers are
18959 able to display rotations.
18967 \begin_layout Standard
18972 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18977 adds lines for all cell borders.
18980 \begin_layout Subsection
18982 \begin_inset Index idx
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 Tables ! Longtables
18992 \begin_inset Index idx
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \begin_layout Standard
19005 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19012 \begin_inset space ~
19021 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19022 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19025 \begin_layout Description
19030 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19031 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19032 except for the first page, if
19035 \begin_inset space ~
19043 \begin_layout Description
19047 \begin_inset space ~
19052 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19053 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19056 \begin_layout Description
19061 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19062 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19063 except for the last page, if
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19074 \begin_layout Description
19078 \begin_inset space ~
19083 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19084 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19087 \begin_layout Description
19088 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19089 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19091 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19095 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19098 \begin_inset space ~
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19108 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19109 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19115 In this context, first means first in this order:
19118 \begin_inset space ~
19130 \begin_inset space ~
19135 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19138 \begin_layout Standard
19140 \begin_inset Tabular
19141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19142 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19143 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19145 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19146 <row endfirsthead="true">
19147 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19158 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19167 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19177 <row endfirsthead="true">
19178 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19198 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <row endhead="true">
19211 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19222 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19231 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19241 <row endhead="true">
19242 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19262 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19274 <row endfoot="true">
19275 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19295 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19326 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <row endlastfoot="true">
21257 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 \begin_layout Subsection
21296 \begin_inset Index idx
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21308 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21315 \begin_layout Standard
21316 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21317 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21318 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21319 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21323 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21326 \begin_layout Standard
21327 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21328 for the column in the table dialog.
21329 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21330 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21336 \begin_inset Tabular
21337 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21338 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21340 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21341 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 This is longer now.
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21543 This is longer now.
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 \begin_layout Standard
21575 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21576 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21582 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21588 Selection with the mouse or with
21592 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21593 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21594 the selection from outside the table.
21597 \begin_layout Section
21599 \begin_inset Index idx
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21618 \begin_layout Subsection
21622 \begin_layout Standard
21623 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21624 have a fixed location.
21626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21633 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21641 \begin_inset space ~
21646 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21647 too many notes on the current page.
21650 \begin_layout Standard
21651 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21652 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21653 and pages without text.
21654 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21655 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21656 Floats are therefore numbered.
21657 Referencing is described in section
21658 \begin_inset space ~
21662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21664 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21671 \begin_layout Standard
21672 To insert a float, use the menu
21674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21678 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21679 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21681 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21682 \begin_inset Index idx
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21692 paragraph within the float.
21693 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21694 by left-clicking on the box label.
21695 A closed float box looks like this:
21696 \begin_inset Graphics
21697 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21702 – a gray button with a red label.
21705 \begin_layout Standard
21706 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21707 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21710 \begin_layout Subsection
21714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21718 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21723 \begin_inset Index idx
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 Floats ! Figure floats
21735 \begin_layout Standard
21737 \begin_inset space ~
21741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21743 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21747 was created using the menu
21749 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21750 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21756 arg "float-insert figure"
21760 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21769 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21773 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21774 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21776 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21778 \begin_inset space ~
21786 arg "layout-paragraph"
21792 \begin_layout Standard
21793 \begin_inset Float figure
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 \begin_inset Graphics
21801 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21816 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21820 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21833 \begin_layout Standard
21834 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21835 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21837 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21846 ) and refer to it using the menu
21848 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21854 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21858 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21859 vague references like
21860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21867 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21877 For more about cross-references, see section
21878 \begin_inset space ~
21882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21884 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21891 \begin_layout Standard
21892 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21893 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21894 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21895 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21896 as described in section
21897 \begin_inset space ~
21901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21903 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21909 \begin_inset space ~
21913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21915 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21919 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21920 You can also set the images one below the other.
21922 \begin_inset space ~
21926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21928 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21935 reference "fig:Platypus"
21939 are the subfigures.
21942 \begin_layout Standard
21943 \begin_inset Float figure
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21953 \begin_inset Float figure
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21964 name "fig:Undefinable"
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 \begin_inset Graphics
21978 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21989 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21993 \begin_inset Float figure
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22004 name "fig:Platypus"
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 \begin_inset Graphics
22018 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22030 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22042 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22046 Two distorted images.
22059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22061 \begin_inset Index idx
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 Floats ! Table floats
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22074 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22076 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22077 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22080 or the toolbar button
22083 arg "float-insert table"
22087 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22088 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22089 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22097 reference "tab:Table-float"
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22105 \begin_inset Float table
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22116 name "tab:Table-float"
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 \begin_inset Tabular
22131 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22132 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22286 \end{array}\right]$
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22328 \begin_layout Subsection
22330 \begin_inset Index idx
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 \begin_layout Standard
22343 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22344 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22345 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22347 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22355 \begin_inset space ~
22363 \begin_layout Section
22365 \begin_inset Index idx
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 \begin_layout Standard
22378 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22380 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22381 \begin_inset space \space{}
22388 \begin_layout Standard
22389 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22395 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22396 and its alignment within the page.
22399 \begin_layout Standard
22401 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22411 height_special "totalheight"
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 This is a minipage.
22418 The text is set in an italic style.
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22425 another formatting.
22433 \begin_layout Standard
22434 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22437 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22441 as described in section
22442 \begin_inset space ~
22446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22448 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22453 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22470 height_special "totalheight"
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22475 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22485 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22495 height_special "totalheight"
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22500 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22508 \begin_layout Standard
22509 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22515 \begin_layout Standard
22516 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22518 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22525 \begin_inset space ~
22533 \begin_layout Chapter
22534 Mathematical Formulas
22535 \begin_inset Index idx
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 \begin_inset Index idx
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22579 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22586 \begin_layout Standard
22587 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22592 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22595 \begin_layout Section
22597 \begin_inset Index idx
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 \begin_layout Standard
22610 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22623 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22625 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22626 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22627 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22629 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22635 \begin_layout Standard
22636 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22640 \begin_inset space ~
22645 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22649 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22650 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22653 \begin_layout Standard
22654 This is a line with an inline formula
22655 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22661 \begin_layout Standard
22662 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22663 paragraph, like this one:
22664 \begin_inset Formula
22671 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22674 \begin_layout Standard
22675 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22676 For example, typing
22677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22690 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22691 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22695 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22698 \begin_inset space ~
22706 \begin_layout Subsection
22707 Navigating in Formulas
22708 \begin_inset Index idx
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 \begin_layout Standard
22721 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22722 achieved with the arrow keys.
22723 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22724 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22729 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22730 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22734 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22738 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22741 \end{array}\right]$
22749 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22754 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22755 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22758 \begin_layout Standard
22763 , printed in this document as
22764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22775 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22776 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22777 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22782 For example, if you want
22783 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22791 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22801 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22805 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22810 , since in the latter case only the
22813 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22818 will be under the square root sign:
22819 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22825 \begin_layout Standard
22826 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22828 \begin_inset Formula
22830 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22839 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22840 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22843 \begin_layout Subsection
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22849 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22853 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22854 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22855 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22856 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22857 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22860 \begin_layout Subsection
22861 Exponents and Subscripts
22862 \begin_inset Index idx
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_inset Index idx
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 \begin_layout Standard
22885 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22888 arg "math-superscript"
22894 arg "math-subscript"
22897 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22899 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22902 , type in a formula
22905 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22915 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22921 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22925 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22931 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22937 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22946 , you have to use an extra
22950 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22951 For example, if you want
22952 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22958 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22964 Subscripts are similar: To get
22965 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22979 \begin_layout Subsection
22981 \begin_inset Index idx
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22994 Create a fraction either with the command
23000 or by using the icon
23003 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23009 \begin_inset space ~
23015 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23016 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23017 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23022 To move back up, press
23027 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23028 \begin_inset Formula
23030 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23033 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23041 \begin_layout Subsection
23043 \begin_inset Index idx
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 \begin_layout Standard
23056 Roots can be created using the
23059 \begin_inset space ~
23067 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23073 arg "math-insert \\root"
23095 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23101 always produces a square root.
23104 \begin_layout Subsection
23105 Operators with Limits
23106 \begin_inset Index idx
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 \begin_inset Index idx
23119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23128 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23137 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23141 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23144 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23145 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23146 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23147 The sum operator will automatically place its
23148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23155 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23157 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23161 \begin_inset Formula
23163 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23168 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23172 \begin_layout Standard
23173 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23175 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23176 behind the operator and using the menu
23178 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23179 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23181 \begin_inset space ~
23185 \begin_inset space ~
23199 \begin_layout Standard
23200 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23209 \begin_inset Index idx
23212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 \begin_inset Formula
23221 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23226 which will place the
23227 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23239 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23240 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23246 \begin_layout Standard
23247 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23254 Have a look at section
23255 \begin_inset space ~
23259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23261 reference "sub:Functions"
23265 for an explanation of function macros.
23268 \begin_layout Subsection
23270 \begin_inset Index idx
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 \begin_layout Standard
23283 Most math symbols can be found in the
23286 \begin_inset space ~
23291 under one of several categories; including
23308 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23312 \begin_layout Standard
23313 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23314 you don't have to use the
23317 \begin_inset space ~
23322 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23323 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23326 \begin_layout Subsection
23328 \begin_inset Index idx
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23340 \begin_layout Standard
23341 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23346 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23352 \begin_inset space ~
23360 arg "math-insert \\space"
23364 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23365 For example, the sequence
23370 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23374 \begin_inset Graphics
23375 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23380 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23381 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23382 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23383 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23385 Here are two examples:
23388 \begin_layout Standard
23398 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23404 \begin_layout Standard
23414 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23420 \begin_layout Subsection
23422 \begin_inset Index idx
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23434 name "sub:Functions"
23441 \begin_layout Standard
23445 \begin_inset space ~
23450 contains under the button
23453 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23456 a number of function macros, such as
23457 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23461 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23469 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23476 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23477 avoid confusions, because
23478 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23482 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23488 \begin_layout Standard
23489 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23491 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23495 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23503 are placed, as described in section
23504 \begin_inset space ~
23508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23510 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23517 \begin_layout Subsection
23519 \begin_inset Index idx
23522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 \begin_layout Standard
23532 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23534 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23535 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23536 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23539 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23540 Our example is entered by typing
23545 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23552 \begin_inset space ~
23556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23558 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23562 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23565 \begin_layout Standard
23566 \begin_inset Float table
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23577 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23581 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 \begin_inset Tabular
23592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23593 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24178 \begin_layout Standard
24179 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24182 \begin_inset space ~
24190 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24193 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24197 \begin_layout Section
24198 Brackets and Delimiters
24199 \begin_inset Index idx
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 \begin_inset Index idx
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24221 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24228 \begin_layout Standard
24229 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24230 For some purposes, using just the keys
24235 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24236 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24237 toolbar delimiter icon
24240 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24244 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24245 \begin_inset Formula
24247 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24255 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24256 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24260 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24263 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24269 \begin_inset Formula
24271 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24279 \begin_layout Standard
24280 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24281 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24285 \begin_layout Standard
24286 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24287 left side and right side.
24288 If you use the option
24291 \begin_inset space ~
24296 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24297 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24298 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24303 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24306 \begin_layout Standard
24307 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24308 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24309 is to go inside the brackets.
24310 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24315 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24316 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24317 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24321 arg "math-delim ( )"
24327 \begin_layout Section
24328 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24329 \begin_inset Index idx
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Index idx
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 \begin_inset Index idx
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24361 \begin_layout Standard
24362 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24365 \begin_inset space ~
24373 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24377 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24378 Here is an example:
24379 \begin_inset Formula
24381 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24390 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24391 \begin_inset space ~
24395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24397 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24402 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24403 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24404 This alignment is set in the box
24409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24457 for every column as default.
24458 For example, the sequence
24459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24470 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24471 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24472 corresponds to the relevant column.
24473 The result will look like this:
24474 \begin_inset Formula
24477 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24478 column & has & has\, right\\
24479 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24488 \begin_layout Standard
24489 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24492 arg "newline-insert newline"
24495 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24496 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24498 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24501 or the math toolbar.
24504 \begin_layout Standard
24505 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24506 It can be created with the menu
24508 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24509 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24511 \begin_inset space ~
24523 Here is an example:
24524 \begin_inset Formula
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24542 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24545 arg "newline-insert newline"
24549 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24554 arg "newline-insert newline"
24557 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24565 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24566 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24567 A new row is created by every further entry of
24570 arg "newline-insert newline"
24574 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24575 Here is an example:
24576 \begin_inset Formula
24578 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24579 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24584 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24585 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24586 \begin_inset Formula
24588 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24597 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24604 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24605 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24608 reference "eq:asquared"
24613 The other types are described in section
24614 \begin_inset space ~
24618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24620 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24627 \begin_layout Section
24628 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24629 \begin_inset Index idx
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24633 Math ! Formula numbering
24639 \begin_inset Index idx
24642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 Math ! Referencing formulas
24649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24651 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24658 \begin_layout Standard
24659 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24661 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24662 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24664 \begin_inset space ~
24668 \begin_inset space ~
24676 arg "math-number-toggle"
24680 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24681 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24682 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24683 the document class.
24684 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24685 separated by a dot:
24686 \begin_inset Formula
24696 arg "math-number-toggle"
24699 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24700 You can only number displayed formulas.
24703 \begin_layout Standard
24704 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24706 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24707 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24709 \begin_inset space ~
24713 \begin_inset space ~
24721 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24724 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24725 \begin_inset Formula
24728 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24734 To number all lines use the shortcut
24737 arg "math-number-toggle"
24743 \begin_layout Standard
24744 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24747 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24748 A label is inserted with the menu
24750 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24759 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24760 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24761 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24773 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24774 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24775 We inserted in the following example the label
24776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24783 in the second line:
24784 \begin_inset Formula
24786 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24787 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24792 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24793 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24794 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24796 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24798 \begin_inset space ~
24806 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24810 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24811 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24812 as the formula number:
24815 \begin_layout Standard
24816 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24819 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24826 \begin_layout Standard
24827 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24828 \begin_inset space ~
24832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24834 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24839 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24847 \begin_layout Section
24848 User defined math macros
24849 \begin_inset Index idx
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24861 \begin_layout Standard
24862 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24863 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24864 Math macros are explained in section
24867 \begin_inset space ~
24879 \begin_layout Section
24883 \begin_layout Subsection
24885 \begin_inset Index idx
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24897 \begin_layout Standard
24898 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24899 To set a font in a formula, use the
24902 \begin_inset space ~
24910 arg "math-insert \\font"
24913 , or enter its command, listed in table
24914 \begin_inset space ~
24918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24920 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 \begin_inset Float table
24933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24934 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24939 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24943 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 \begin_inset Tabular
24954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24955 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24989 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25103 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25225 \begin_layout Standard
25226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25250 \begin_layout Standard
25251 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25252 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25257 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25258 space when you need a space in the box.
25259 Here is an example where
25260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25271 denotes the set of numbers:
25272 \begin_inset Formula
25274 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25282 \begin_layout Standard
25283 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25284 You can, for example, put a character in
25293 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25297 \begin_inset Newline newline
25300 So it is better not to use this feature.
25303 \begin_layout Standard
25304 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25305 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25309 \begin_inset Newline newline
25312 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25318 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25319 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25325 \begin_layout Standard
25332 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25335 \begin_layout Standard
25336 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25338 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25339 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25341 \begin_inset space ~
25349 \begin_layout Subsection
25351 \begin_inset Index idx
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 \begin_layout Standard
25364 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25366 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25370 \begin_inset space ~
25374 \begin_inset space ~
25382 \begin_inset space ~
25390 arg "math-insert \\font"
25394 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25395 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25396 Here is an example:
25397 \begin_inset Formula
25400 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25401 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25410 \begin_layout Subsection
25412 \begin_inset Index idx
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25424 \begin_layout Standard
25425 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25426 automatically chosen in most situations.
25444 For most characters,
25452 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25453 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25458 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25459 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25461 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25464 arg "math-insert \\style"
25468 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25469 For example, you can set
25470 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25473 , which is normally in
25482 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25486 The four styles are used in the following example:
25489 \begin_layout Standard
25490 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25494 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25498 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25502 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25508 \begin_layout Standard
25509 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25510 is set in a particular size with the menu
25512 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25514 \begin_inset space ~
25519 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25520 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25521 will be adjusted to correspond.
25522 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25533 \begin_layout Standard
25537 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25543 \begin_layout Section
25545 \begin_inset Index idx
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25555 \begin_inset Index idx
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 \begin_layout Standard
25568 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25569 (AMS) that are in common use.
25572 \begin_layout Subsection
25573 Enabling AMS-Support
25576 \begin_layout Standard
25577 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25578 the document by selecting the checkbox
25581 \begin_inset space ~
25585 \begin_inset space ~
25589 \begin_inset space ~
25596 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25600 \begin_inset Index idx
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25604 Document ! Settings
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25618 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25619 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25622 \begin_layout Subsection
25624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25626 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25631 \begin_inset Index idx
25634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25635 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25645 LyX allows you to choose between
25666 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25673 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25676 \begin_layout Chapter
25680 \begin_layout Section
25682 \begin_inset Index idx
25685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25694 name "sec:Cross-References"
25701 \begin_layout Standard
25702 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25703 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25705 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25706 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25707 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25710 \begin_layout Enumerate
25714 \begin_layout Enumerate
25715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25717 name "enu:Second-item"
25724 \begin_layout Enumerate
25728 \begin_layout Standard
25729 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25734 or by pressing the toolbar button
25741 A gray label box like this:
25742 \begin_inset Graphics
25743 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25748 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25749 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25784 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25785 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25801 \begin_layout Standard
25802 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25804 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25807 or the toolbar button
25810 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25814 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25815 \begin_inset Graphics
25816 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25821 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25823 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25836 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25840 \begin_layout Standard
25841 As an alternative to
25843 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25846 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25851 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25852 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25854 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25868 \begin_inset space ~
25872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25874 reference "enu:Second-item"
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 It is recommended to use a protected space
25886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25887 described in section
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25894 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25903 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25904 line breaks between them.
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25908 There are six formats of cross-references:
25911 \begin_layout Description
25912 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25915 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25922 \begin_layout Description
25923 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25924 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25936 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25943 \begin_layout Description
25944 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25945 \begin_inset space ~
25949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25950 LatexCommand pageref
25951 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25958 \begin_layout Description
25960 \begin_inset space ~
25964 \begin_inset space ~
25967 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25969 LatexCommand vpageref
25970 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25975 \begin_inset Newline newline
25978 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25979 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25980 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25981 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25982 it prints “on the next page”.
25983 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25986 \begin_layout Description
25988 \begin_inset space ~
25992 \begin_inset space ~
25996 \begin_inset space ~
25999 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26002 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26007 \begin_inset Newline newline
26010 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26016 ; otherwise it behaves like
26020 \begin_inset space ~
26024 \begin_inset space ~
26033 \begin_layout Description
26035 \begin_inset space ~
26038 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26039 \begin_inset Newline newline
26043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26051 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26060 \begin_inset Index idx
26063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26064 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26070 \begin_inset Index idx
26073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26074 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26085 \begin_inset Newline newline
26088 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26091 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26095 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26096 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26104 is the default and preferred because
26108 supports only English documents.
26109 The format is specified by using the command
26121 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26122 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 ) can be done with this command
26136 \begin_inset Newline newline
26143 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26148 \begin_inset Newline newline
26151 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26155 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26162 \begin_layout Description
26164 \begin_inset space ~
26167 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26169 LatexCommand nameref
26170 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26178 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26179 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26180 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26184 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26188 \begin_layout Standard
26189 You can only use the style
26193 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26197 is always possible.
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26202 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26204 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26205 \begin_inset space ~
26209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26211 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26218 \begin_layout Standard
26219 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26232 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26233 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26241 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26242 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26245 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26251 \begin_layout Standard
26252 You can change labels at any time.
26253 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26254 do not need to think about this.
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26258 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26259 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26260 instead of the reference.
26263 \begin_layout Standard
26264 References are described in detail in the section
26265 \begin_inset space ~
26269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26279 \begin_inset space ~
26287 \begin_layout Section
26288 Table of Contents and other Listings
26289 \begin_inset Index idx
26292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_inset Index idx
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26318 \begin_layout Subsection
26320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26322 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26329 \begin_layout Standard
26330 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26332 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26333 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26335 \begin_inset space ~
26339 \begin_inset space ~
26345 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26346 If you click on it, the
26350 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26351 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26352 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26354 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26356 \begin_inset space ~
26361 that is described in section
26362 \begin_inset space ~
26366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26368 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26375 \begin_layout Standard
26376 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26377 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26385 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26389 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26397 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26401 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26403 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26406 \begin_layout Subsection
26407 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26410 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26417 \begin_layout Standard
26418 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26420 You can insert them via the
26422 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26426 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26429 \begin_layout Section
26430 URLs and Hyperlinks
26431 \begin_inset Index idx
26434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 \begin_inset Index idx
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 \begin_layout Subsection
26455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26465 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26467 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26473 \begin_layout Standard
26474 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26475 \begin_inset Flex URL
26478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26488 \begin_layout Standard
26489 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26495 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26516 \begin_layout Subsection
26518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26520 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26527 \begin_layout Standard
26528 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26530 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26533 or with the toolbar button
26540 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26549 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26550 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26553 name "LyX's homepage"
26554 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26558 , an Email address like this:
26559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26561 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26562 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26567 , or a link to a file.
26570 \begin_layout Standard
26571 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26584 to the link target.
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26588 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26589 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26590 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26591 the text style dialog.
26592 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26596 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26598 name "LyX's homepage"
26599 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26611 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26613 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26614 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26618 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26620 \begin_inset Newline newline
26628 \begin_inset Newline newline
26635 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26638 \begin_layout Section
26640 \begin_inset Index idx
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26652 name "sec:Appendices"
26659 \begin_layout Standard
26660 Appendices are created with the menu
26662 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26664 \begin_inset space ~
26668 \begin_inset space ~
26674 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26675 as the appendix part of the book.
26676 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26681 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26682 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26683 and the subsection number.
26684 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26688 \begin_layout Standard
26690 \begin_inset space ~
26694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26696 reference "chap:Credits"
26701 \begin_inset space ~
26705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26707 reference "sub:Export"
26714 \begin_layout Section
26716 \begin_inset Index idx
26719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26728 name "sec:Bibliography"
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26737 You can include a bibliography database,
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 Known under the name
26743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26755 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26756 manually, using the paragraph environment
26760 , which was described in section
26761 \begin_inset space ~
26765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26767 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26772 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26773 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26777 use a bibliography database.
26780 \begin_layout Subsection
26781 The Bibliography Environment
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26789 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26791 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26800 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26802 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26811 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26817 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26820 or the toolbar button
26823 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26827 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26828 containing the available citations.
26829 Select one or more keys from the list and
26839 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26840 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26846 entry with surrounding brackets.
26851 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26852 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26867 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26872 key "latexcompanion"
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26881 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26894 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26896 \begin_inset space ~
26904 arg "layout-paragraph"
26908 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26911 \begin_layout Subsection
26912 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26913 \begin_inset Index idx
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 Bibliography ! Databases
26923 \begin_inset Index idx
26926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26935 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26951 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26952 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26957 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26959 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26960 your working field in a database.
26961 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26962 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26963 list for that document.
26964 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26968 \begin_layout Standard
26969 The database is a text file with the file extension
26970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26981 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26982 The format is explained in
26983 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26989 and in the LaTeX books (
26990 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26992 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26997 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26998 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26999 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27000 \begin_inset Flex URL
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27005 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27013 \begin_layout Standard
27014 To use a database, use the menu
27016 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27021 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27040 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27041 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27048 Add bibliography to TOC
27050 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27055 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27056 in the document or just the cited references.
27059 \begin_layout Standard
27060 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27072 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27073 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27074 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27076 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27083 \begin_inset Newline newline
27087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27089 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27106 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27107 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27113 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27114 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27119 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27120 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27121 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27136 The following variants are possible:
27139 \begin_layout Description
27140 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27141 with other bibliography packages (e.
27142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27146 \begin_inset space \space{}
27153 ), only with the package
27157 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27161 \begin_layout Description
27162 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27163 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27164 with all bibliography packages, except
27169 \begin_layout Description
27170 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27175 , works with all bibliography packages
27178 \begin_layout Standard
27179 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27181 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27187 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27196 \begin_layout Standard
27197 When you select the option
27199 Sectioned bibliography
27203 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27204 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27207 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27208 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27210 Customizing Bibliographies
27218 Additional Features
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27225 the two methods of creating them.
27226 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27227 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27228 We used the style file
27232 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27235 \begin_layout Subsection
27236 Bibliography layout
27237 \begin_inset Index idx
27240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27241 Bibliography ! Layout
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27251 For this feature you need to enable the option
27257 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27261 \begin_inset Index idx
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27265 Document ! Settings
27275 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27276 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27277 in the previous section.
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27281 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27282 the citation reference window.
27283 Here is an example where the text
27284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27288 \begin_inset space ~
27292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27295 appears after the reference:
27298 \begin_layout Standard
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27303 key "latexcompanion"
27310 \begin_layout Section
27312 \begin_inset Index idx
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27332 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27334 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27336 \begin_inset space ~
27341 or the toolbar button
27348 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27349 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27350 by LyX as the index entry.
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27357 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27359 \begin_inset space ~
27365 A light blue box labeled
27366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27377 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27378 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27382 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27383 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27387 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27394 \begin_layout Subsection
27395 Grouping Index Entries
27396 \begin_inset Index idx
27399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27411 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27412 lists under the entry
27413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27421 First we create the entry
27422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27430 \begin_inset space ~
27434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27436 reference "sub:Lists"
27441 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27442 \begin_inset space ~
27446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27448 reference "sec:Itemize"
27452 , we insert the command
27455 \begin_layout Standard
27461 \begin_layout Standard
27465 \begin_layout Standard
27471 \begin_layout Standard
27472 for the enumerated list in section
27473 \begin_inset space ~
27477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27479 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27486 \begin_layout Standard
27487 The exclamation mark
27488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 marks the grouping levels.
27496 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27497 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27498 If we don't have an index entry for
27499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27506 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27509 \begin_layout Subsection
27511 \begin_inset Index idx
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27515 Index ! Page ranges
27523 \begin_layout Standard
27524 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27526 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27527 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27528 an index entry in section
27529 \begin_inset space ~
27533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27535 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27542 \begin_layout Standard
27545 Paragraph environments|(
27548 \begin_layout Standard
27549 and another entry at the end of section
27550 \begin_inset space ~
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27556 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27566 Paragraph environments|)
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27594 respectively start and end the index range.
27595 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27596 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27597 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27598 An example is the index entry
27599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27602 Document ! Settings
27603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27609 \begin_layout Subsection
27611 \begin_inset Index idx
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27615 Index ! Cross referencing
27623 \begin_layout Standard
27624 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27625 We referred for example in the index entry
27626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27634 \begin_inset space ~
27638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27640 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27644 ) to the index entry
27645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27652 in the same section using the entry
27655 \begin_layout Standard
27658 GIF|see{Image formats}
27661 \begin_layout Standard
27662 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27663 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27664 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27667 \begin_layout Subsection
27669 \begin_inset Index idx
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 Index ! Entry order
27681 \begin_layout Standard
27682 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27683 follow the rules for the index order.
27684 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27691 \begin_inset space ~
27695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27697 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27706 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27707 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27732 \begin_inset Index idx
27735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27736 Dummy entries ! maïs
27742 \begin_inset Index idx
27745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27746 Dummy entries ! maître
27752 \begin_inset Index idx
27755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27756 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27761 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27762 maïs, maison, maître.
27763 To achieve this, we use the command
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27769 previous entry@current entry
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 In our case we want to have
27774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27789 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27799 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27800 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27801 See the next subsection for an example.
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27805 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27817 to generate the index (see sec.
27818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27824 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27833 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27841 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27845 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27846 index commands start with
27847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27859 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27864 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27867 \begin_layout Standard
27879 \begin_layout Standard
27891 \begin_layout Subsection
27893 \begin_inset Index idx
27896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27897 Index ! Entry layout
27905 \begin_layout Standard
27906 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27907 \begin_inset Index idx
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 This is an italic dummy entry
27918 You can also format the page number using the character
27919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27926 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27927 We can write for example
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27933 italic page number:|textit
27936 \begin_layout Standard
27937 to get the page number in italic.
27938 \begin_inset Index idx
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27942 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27947 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27965 \begin_inset space ~
27971 Have a look at section
27972 \begin_inset space ~
27976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27978 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27982 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27994 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27998 to generate the index, see sec.
27999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28014 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28019 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28020 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28023 key "latexcompanion"
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28038 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28039 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28040 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28041 If so, put the following in the preamble
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28056 \begin_layout Standard
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28066 \begin_layout Standard
28067 in the index entry.
28068 \begin_inset Index idx
28071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28072 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28077 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28078 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28079 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28082 \begin_layout Standard
28083 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28084 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28085 a bold font for all index entries.
28086 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28098 documentation for details,
28099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28101 key "makeindex,xindy"
28108 \begin_layout Subsection
28110 \begin_inset Index idx
28113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28122 name "sub:Index-Program"
28129 \begin_layout Standard
28130 If the index generation program
28134 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28138 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28148 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28149 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28150 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28151 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28161 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28162 dialog, see section
28163 \begin_inset space ~
28167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28169 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28174 The available options are listed and explained in
28175 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28177 key "makeindex,xindy"
28182 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28188 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28191 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28192 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28196 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28197 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28200 \begin_layout Subsection
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28205 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28206 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28214 next to the standard index.
28215 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28216 that add this feature.
28222 \begin_inset Index idx
28225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28226 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28231 package to generate multiple indexes.
28232 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28237 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28245 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28246 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28247 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28255 \begin_layout Standard
28256 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28258 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28259 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28262 and select the option
28264 Use multiple Indexes
28271 already contains the standard index
28272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28280 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28281 also appear as a heading) to the
28285 input field and press the
28290 The new index now also appears in the list.
28291 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28295 \begin_layout Standard
28296 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28299 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28306 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28307 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28308 are additional features:
28311 \begin_layout Itemize
28312 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28313 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28316 \begin_layout Itemize
28317 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28318 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28326 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28327 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28328 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28329 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28332 \begin_layout Section
28333 Nomenclature/Glossary
28334 \begin_inset Index idx
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28344 \begin_inset Index idx
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28378 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28385 \begin_layout Standard
28386 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28387 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28388 called nomenclature or glossary.
28391 \begin_layout Standard
28392 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28398 \begin_inset Index idx
28401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28408 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28415 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28419 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28420 and then use the menu
28422 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28433 or the toolbar button
28436 arg "nomencl-insert"
28441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28452 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28457 The first is the term or
28461 that you wish to define.
28466 of the term or symbol.
28469 \begin_layout Standard
28470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28486 \begin_layout Subsection
28487 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28488 \begin_inset Index idx
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28492 Nomenclature ! Layout
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28505 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28519 \begin_inset Newline newline
28527 \begin_inset Newline newline
28533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28540 character starts/ends the formula.
28541 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28553 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28563 \begin_layout Standard
28564 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28565 \begin_inset space ~
28569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28571 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28582 \begin_inset space ~
28587 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28588 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28593 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28600 in this document is:
28601 \begin_inset Newline newline
28606 dummy entry for the character
28611 \begin_inset Newline newline
28623 \begin_inset space ~
28633 font use the command
28662 \begin_layout Standard
28663 If the characters |
28664 \begin_inset space \space{}
28668 \begin_inset space \space{}
28672 \begin_inset space \space{}
28676 \begin_inset space \space{}
28680 \begin_inset space \space{}
28683 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28684 a quote character in front of them.
28685 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28686 LatexCommand nomenclature
28687 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28688 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28695 \begin_layout Subsection
28696 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28697 \begin_inset Index idx
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28711 the symbol definition.
28712 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28714 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28717 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28718 LatexCommand nomenclature
28720 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28727 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28731 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28732 LatexCommand nomenclature
28735 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28740 They will be sorted by
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28767 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28770 will be sorted before the
28774 since the character
28775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28782 is considered in sorting.
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28786 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28789 \begin_inset space ~
28794 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28795 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28797 For the example given, you can insert
28801 in this field for the
28802 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28809 will be located before
28810 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28817 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28831 \begin_layout Subsection
28832 Nomenclature Options
28833 \begin_inset Index idx
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28837 Nomenclature ! Options
28845 \begin_layout Standard
28850 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28851 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28854 \begin_layout Description
28855 refeq Appends the phrase
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28871 to every nomenclature entry, where
28877 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28880 \begin_layout Description
28881 refpage Appends the phrase
28882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28897 to every nomenclature entry, where
28903 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28906 \begin_layout Description
28907 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28910 \begin_layout Standard
28911 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28912 class options list in the
28914 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28918 In this document the options
28925 \begin_layout Standard
28926 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28934 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28939 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28942 \begin_layout Description
28952 \begin_layout Description
28955 nomrefpage Like the
28962 \begin_layout Description
28965 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28974 \begin_layout Description
28978 \begin_inset space ~
28984 \begin_inset space ~
28989 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28992 \begin_layout Standard
28994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29001 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29002 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29005 \begin_layout Standard
29013 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29016 \begin_inset Newline newline
29023 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29028 \begin_inset Newline newline
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29047 by their translation.
29050 \begin_layout Subsection
29051 Printing the Nomenclature
29052 \begin_inset Index idx
29055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29056 Nomenclature ! Printing
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29065 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29067 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29068 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29084 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29085 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29086 You can choose between these settings:
29089 \begin_layout Description
29090 Default a space of 1
29091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29097 \begin_layout Description
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29103 \begin_inset space ~
29106 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29109 \begin_layout Description
29110 Custom custom space
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29123 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29131 For example, in order to change the name to
29135 , add the following line to the preamble:
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29146 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29149 \begin_layout Subsection
29150 Nomenclature Program
29151 \begin_inset Index idx
29154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29155 Nomenclature ! Program
29161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29163 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 LyX uses the program
29175 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29176 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29181 by adding options, see section
29182 \begin_inset space ~
29186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29188 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29193 The available options are listed and explained in
29194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29196 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29203 \begin_layout Section
29205 \begin_inset Index idx
29208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 \begin_inset Index idx
29218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29219 Document ! Branches
29225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29227 name "sec:Branches"
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29236 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29237 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29238 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29242 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29243 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29244 To create a branch, either select the menu
29246 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29247 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29250 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29252 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29259 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29260 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29261 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29262 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29263 (see below for an example).
29264 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29265 to the name of the other) and to add
29266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29278 \begin_inset space ~
29281 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29282 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29286 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29287 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29289 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29292 where you can choose a branch.
29293 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29298 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29299 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29303 \begin_inset Branch Question
29306 \begin_layout Standard
29307 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29335 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29336 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29339 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29340 Consider for example a file
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29348 which has the above branches.
29350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29357 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29381 branch were inactive,
29382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29397 branch was active, likewise
29398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29413 branch was active, and
29414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29417 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29421 if both branches were active.
29422 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29432 \begin_layout Standard
29433 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29434 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29436 For example you can define for the question branch
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29441 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29442 \begin_inset space ~
29446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29448 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29460 \begin_layout Standard
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29480 \begin_layout Standard
29481 and for the answer branch
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29494 \begin_layout Standard
29504 \begin_layout Standard
29505 \begin_inset Branch Question
29508 \begin_layout Standard
29512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29544 \begin_layout Standard
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29576 \begin_layout Standard
29577 Now it is possible to use the
29581 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29588 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29591 commands to obtain conditional output.
29592 Here is an example formula where only the
29599 \begin_inset Formula
29601 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29610 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29618 \begin_layout Standard
29619 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29625 \begin_inset space \space{}
29628 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29629 For this advanced usage, see the
29634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29637 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 \begin_layout Section
29646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29648 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29653 \begin_inset Index idx
29656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29668 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29669 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29672 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29674 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29679 \begin_inset Index idx
29682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29683 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29688 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29689 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29690 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29691 part of the document.
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 The header information in the dialog tab
29700 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29701 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29702 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29703 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29711 \begin_inset space ~
29716 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29717 title and author entries.
29721 \begin_inset space ~
29725 \begin_inset space ~
29729 \begin_inset space ~
29734 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29738 You can specify in the dialog tab
29742 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29747 \begin_inset space ~
29751 \begin_inset space ~
29755 \begin_inset space ~
29760 option allows long links to be split;
29763 \begin_inset space ~
29767 \begin_inset space ~
29771 \begin_inset space ~
29779 \begin_inset space ~
29784 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29787 \begin_inset space ~
29792 colors the different links.
29793 The default colors are:
29796 \begin_layout Labeling
29797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29802 for hyperlinks and URLs
29805 \begin_layout Labeling
29806 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29814 \begin_layout Labeling
29815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 but you can change these in the field
29829 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29832 \begin_layout Standard
29835 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29843 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29844 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29845 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29848 \begin_layout Standard
29853 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29854 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29855 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29865 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29866 when opening the PDF.
29868 \begin_inset space ~
29871 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29872 \begin_inset space ~
29875 1 will only display the sections.
29878 \begin_layout Standard
29879 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29880 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29886 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29896 \begin_layout Section
29897 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29900 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29907 \begin_layout Subsection
29909 \begin_inset Index idx
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29921 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29928 \begin_layout Standard
29929 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29930 constructs, but not all.
29931 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29932 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29933 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29934 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29935 and their commands.
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29941 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29956 \begin_inset space ~
29961 or by the toolbar button
29974 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29984 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29985 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29986 using the LaTeX-command
29992 , you can write the command part
29998 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30002 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30003 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30004 the following example:
30007 \begin_layout Standard
30008 \begin_inset Graphics
30009 filename clipart/ERT.png
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30021 \begin_layout Standard
30022 This is a line with a
30026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30050 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30058 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30059 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30067 \begin_layout Subsection
30068 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30069 \begin_inset Argument 1
30072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30079 \begin_inset Index idx
30082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30091 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30098 \begin_layout Standard
30099 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30100 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30101 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30110 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30111 any time if you know the right commands.
30112 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30113 is the end of the day.
30114 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30115 all caption labels bold.
30116 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30118 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30123 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30124 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30125 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 As result you find that the package
30142 \begin_inset Index idx
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30146 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30152 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30154 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30157 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30172 \begin_inset space ~
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30185 usepackage[options]{package name}
30188 \begin_layout Standard
30189 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30190 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30191 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30194 \begin_layout Standard
30195 In your case the package name is
30200 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30205 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30206 So you add the command
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30214 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 For more commands provided by the
30227 package, have a look at its documentation,
30228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30245 For example if you use a
30249 class, you don't need the package
30253 , you can instead write
30256 \begin_layout Standard
30261 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30266 \begin_layout Standard
30267 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30268 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30269 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30276 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30280 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30281 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30283 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30284 the previous section.
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30290 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30292 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30300 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30320 \begin_inset Note Note
30323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30324 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30332 \begin_layout Left Header
30333 \begin_inset Argument 1
30336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 \begin_inset Note Note
30359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30360 defines the header line as described below
30368 \begin_layout Center Header
30369 \begin_inset Argument 1
30372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 \begin_layout Right Header
30382 \begin_inset Argument 1
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 \begin_layout Left Footer
30407 \begin_inset Argument 1
30410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30431 \begin_layout Center Footer
30432 \begin_inset Argument 1
30435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30446 \begin_inset Newline newline
30450 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30456 \begin_layout Right Footer
30457 \begin_inset Argument 1
30460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30482 \begin_layout Section
30483 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30486 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30491 \begin_inset Index idx
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 Document ! Header/Footer line
30501 \begin_inset Index idx
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30518 \begin_inset space ~
30529 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30535 \begin_inset space ~
30541 As a second step add in the menu
30543 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30544 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30551 Custom Header/Footerlines
30552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30556 This module offers the following 6
30557 \begin_inset space ~
30563 \begin_layout Description
30565 \begin_inset space ~
30569 \begin_inset space ~
30573 \begin_inset space ~
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30581 \begin_inset space ~
30587 \begin_layout Description
30589 \begin_inset space ~
30593 \begin_inset space ~
30597 \begin_inset space ~
30601 \begin_inset space ~
30605 \begin_inset space ~
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30616 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30617 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30619 \begin_inset space ~
30623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30625 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30629 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30632 \begin_layout Standard
30633 \begin_inset Float figure
30639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30642 \begin_inset Tabular
30643 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30644 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30645 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30647 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30707 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30711 The normal text on the page goes here.
30712 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30714 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30715 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30720 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30758 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30769 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30787 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30810 name "fig:Page-layout"
30814 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30840 \begin_inset space ~
30845 is set to “Default”.
30846 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30855 \begin_layout Subsection
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30860 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30861 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30862 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30863 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30865 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30866 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30869 \begin_layout Standard
30870 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30873 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30886 \begin_inset space ~
30894 \begin_layout Description
30897 thepage prints the current page number
30900 \begin_layout Description
30903 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30906 \begin_layout Description
30909 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30912 \begin_layout Description
30915 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30916 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30923 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30926 because it usually goes in a left header.
30929 \begin_layout Description
30932 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30933 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30935 It is normally used in the right header.
30938 \begin_layout Subsection
30939 Default header/footer
30942 \begin_layout Standard
30943 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30944 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30945 footer has the page number.
30946 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30947 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30948 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30951 \begin_inset space ~
30959 \begin_layout Subsection
30963 \begin_layout Standard
30964 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30965 Some pages are different.
30966 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30967 a new part or chapter in your book.
30968 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30969 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30970 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30973 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30974 Header and footer decoration line
30977 \begin_layout Standard
30978 By default, you get a 0.4
30979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30982 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30983 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30995 in the following way:
30998 \begin_layout Standard
31005 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31018 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31025 \begin_layout Standard
31026 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31027 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31042 Several header/footer lines
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31047 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31048 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31050 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31064 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31065 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 \begin_inset space ~
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31093 headheight}{height}
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 where height is a size in standard units.
31098 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31099 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31100 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31102 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 \begin_inset space ~
31124 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31129 \begin_inset Index idx
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31133 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31139 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31140 for your header/footer.
31143 \begin_layout Subsection
31147 \begin_layout Standard
31148 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31149 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31150 This example consists of the following definition:
31153 \begin_layout Description
31155 \begin_inset space ~
31164 , empty optional argument
31167 \begin_layout Description
31169 \begin_inset space ~
31172 Header empty, empty optional argument
31175 \begin_layout Description
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31186 in the optional argument
31189 \begin_layout Description
31191 \begin_inset space ~
31200 in the optional argument
31203 \begin_layout Description
31205 \begin_inset space ~
31217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31221 \begin_inset Newline newline
31225 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31232 in the optional argument
31235 \begin_layout Description
31237 \begin_inset space ~
31246 , empty optional argument
31249 \begin_layout Description
31252 headrulewidth set to 2
31253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31259 \begin_layout Standard
31260 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31261 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31276 \begin_layout Standard
31277 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31291 pagestyle{headings}
31297 \begin_inset Note Note
31300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31301 switches back to page style with the default headings
31309 \begin_layout Section
31310 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31313 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31318 \begin_inset Index idx
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31328 \begin_inset Index idx
31331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31340 \begin_layout Standard
31341 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31342 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31343 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31346 \begin_layout Subsection
31350 \begin_layout Standard
31351 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31356 \begin_inset Index idx
31359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31365 (on some systems named simply
31370 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31378 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31379 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31387 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31388 automatically installed together with LyX.
31391 \begin_layout Subsection
31395 \begin_layout Standard
31396 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31397 LaTeX, activate the option
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31407 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31413 \begin_inset space ~
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31420 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31440 \begin_inset space ~
31445 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31448 \begin_layout Standard
31449 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31453 \begin_inset space ~
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31469 \begin_layout Standard
31470 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31474 \begin_layout Standard
31475 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31483 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31484 generated by activating the option
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31493 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31501 \begin_layout Subsection
31502 Selected document parts
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31506 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31507 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31508 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31509 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31511 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31515 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31516 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31517 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31521 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31527 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31538 is explained in section
31540 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31545 \begin_inset space ~
31555 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31556 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31558 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31560 Here is the result:
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31564 \begin_inset Preview
31566 \begin_layout Standard
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31575 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31581 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31591 height_special "totalheight"
31594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31619 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31625 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 Previewing works also for colors.
31649 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31667 is explained in section
31674 \begin_inset space ~
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 \begin_inset Preview
31690 \begin_layout Standard
31694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31713 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31718 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31737 \begin_layout Standard
31738 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31744 \begin_layout Standard
31745 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31746 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31747 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31749 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31750 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31751 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31752 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31756 \begin_layout Subsection
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31761 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31764 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31766 \begin_inset space ~
31771 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31772 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31774 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31775 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31776 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31777 the source view window.
31782 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31783 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31784 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31787 \begin_layout Section
31788 Advanced Find and Replace
31789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31791 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31796 \begin_inset Index idx
31799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 \begin_inset Index idx
31809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31818 \begin_layout Subsection
31822 \begin_layout Standard
31823 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31824 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31825 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31826 The key-features are:
31829 \begin_layout Itemize
31830 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31831 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31832 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31836 \begin_layout Itemize
31837 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31838 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31839 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31840 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31843 \begin_layout Itemize
31844 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31845 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31846 outside of mathematics environments
31849 \begin_layout Itemize
31850 Search may be widened to a specific
31855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31859 \begin_inset space ~
31862 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31863 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31870 \begin_layout Itemize
31871 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31872 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31877 \begin_inset space ~
31880 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31883 \begin_layout Subsection
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31888 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31890 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31903 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31906 ) or the toolbar button
31909 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31915 Advanced Find and Replace
31920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31929 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31933 \begin_inset space ~
31938 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31941 arg "break-paragraph"
31945 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31946 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31950 arg "break-paragraph"
31953 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31957 searches backwards.
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31964 \begin_inset space ~
31969 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31983 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31987 Searching for mathematics
31990 \begin_layout Standard
31991 Mathematical formulas, such as
31992 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31995 or something more complex like
31996 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31999 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32004 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32005 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32006 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32007 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32017 \begin_layout Standard
32018 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32019 This is done by switching to the
32023 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32028 This way, entering in the
32035 \begin_layout Itemize
32036 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32037 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32040 \begin_layout Itemize
32041 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32042 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32045 \begin_layout Itemize
32046 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32047 of it only within section headings.
32048 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32049 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32053 \begin_layout Itemize
32054 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32055 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32063 The entries made in the
32067 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32070 \begin_inset space ~
32076 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32080 button or alternatively press
32083 arg "break-paragraph"
32090 while the cursor is in the
32093 \begin_inset space ~
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32102 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32103 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32107 \begin_layout Itemize
32108 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32109 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32117 with its typewriter version
32118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32132 \begin_layout Itemize
32133 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32139 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32151 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32158 (you may want to enable the
32161 \begin_inset space ~
32169 \begin_inset space ~
32174 options and disable the
32182 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32190 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32191 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32195 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32198 , or occurrences of
32199 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32203 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32209 \begin_layout Subsection
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32214 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32223 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32232 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32238 This is done with the context menu
32240 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32241 Insert Regular Expression
32243 while the cursor is in the
32248 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32249 expression matching rules
32253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32260 \begin_inset space ~
32263 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32264 to match expressions.
32269 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32270 same text in the document.
32271 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32272 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32275 \begin_layout Enumerate
32276 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32281 editor the fraction
32282 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32286 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32289 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32290 fractions with the given denominator.
32293 \begin_layout Enumerate
32294 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32306 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32311 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32312 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32313 Also, by inserting a
32314 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32317 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32318 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32321 \begin_layout Standard
32322 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32323 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32324 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32327 , and referring back to them through
32328 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32332 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32336 For example, try searching with the regexp
32337 \begin_inset Newline newline
32340 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32343 \begin_inset Newline newline
32346 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32349 \begin_layout Standard
32350 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32353 \begin_layout Standard
32354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32362 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32363 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32364 sub-expressions is absolute.
32366 \begin_inset space ~
32370 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32373 always refers to the first occurrence of
32374 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32377 in all entered regexps.
32385 \begin_layout Section
32387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32389 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32394 \begin_inset Index idx
32397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32406 \begin_layout Standard
32407 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32410 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32417 key or the toolbar button
32420 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32423 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32424 beginning of the currently selected text.
32425 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32426 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32427 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32428 scrolled so that it is visible.
32429 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32430 n, if any could be found.
32431 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32435 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32436 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32439 \begin_layout Standard
32440 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32443 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32447 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32448 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32449 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32450 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32453 \begin_inset space ~
32461 arg "dialog-show character"
32464 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32465 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32470 \begin_inset Newline newline
32474 \begin_inset Flex URL
32477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32479 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32485 \begin_inset Newline newline
32489 \begin_inset space ~
32492 files for each language.
32493 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32494 \begin_inset space ~
32497 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32506 \begin_inset Newline newline
32509 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32510 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32511 but in most cases these are
32527 is the language code.
32530 \begin_layout Subsection
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32537 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32538 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32543 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32546 you can set the following things:
32549 \begin_layout Description
32551 \begin_inset space ~
32554 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32555 Depending on your platform,
32569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32570 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32571 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32586 \begin_layout Description
32588 \begin_inset space ~
32591 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32592 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32595 \begin_layout Description
32597 \begin_inset space ~
32600 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32606 \begin_inset space \space{}
32610 This should normally not be needed.
32613 \begin_layout Description
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32622 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32634 \begin_layout Description
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32639 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32640 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32641 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32642 appear in a context menu.
32643 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32647 \begin_layout Description
32649 \begin_inset space ~
32653 \begin_inset space ~
32657 \begin_inset space ~
32660 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32664 \begin_layout Section
32666 \begin_inset Index idx
32669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32678 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32685 \begin_layout Standard
32686 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32687 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32699 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32708 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32709 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32710 which are available for many languages.
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32714 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32718 \begin_layout Subsection
32719 Setting up the thesaurus
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32731 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32735 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32740 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32746 \begin_inset space ~
32754 For instance, the US English files are named:
32757 \begin_layout Itemize
32761 \begin_layout Itemize
32765 \begin_layout Standard
32774 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32775 and you just need to point LyX (in
32777 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32778 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32779 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32781 \begin_inset space ~
32786 ) to the path where they are installed.
32790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32791 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32792 ies, typical locations are
32798 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32802 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32806 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32809 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32815 LibreOffice-<Version>
32822 On the Mac, the default location is
32824 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32825 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32826 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32827 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32828 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32829 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32837 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32838 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32839 correct place right away.
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32843 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32844 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32848 \begin_layout Itemize
32849 \begin_inset Flex URL
32852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32854 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32862 \begin_layout Standard
32863 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32864 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32866 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32867 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32868 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32870 \begin_inset space ~
32876 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32877 and point LyX there.
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32883 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32886 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32892 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32895 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32903 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32904 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32905 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32907 \begin_inset space ~
32912 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32915 \begin_layout Subsection
32916 Using the thesaurus
32919 \begin_layout Standard
32920 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32922 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32925 or the toolbar button
32928 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32931 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32933 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32935 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32936 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32937 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32946 ), related terms (such as
32949 \begin_inset space ~
32958 ), compounds (such as
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32970 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32979 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32983 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32984 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32989 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32990 the dictionary, such as the above
32994 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32999 \begin_inset space \space{}
33002 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33003 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33004 For example, looking up the word form
33008 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33013 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33018 \begin_inset space \space{}
33029 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33030 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33031 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33034 \begin_layout Section
33036 \begin_inset Index idx
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 \begin_inset Index idx
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 Document ! Change Tracking
33056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33058 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33067 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33068 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33069 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33073 \begin_inset space ~
33076 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33078 \begin_inset space ~
33086 \begin_layout Standard
33087 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33101 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33102 You can change the color in
33104 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33105 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33107 \begin_inset space ~
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33116 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33122 \begin_inset Index idx
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33126 Color ! Change tracking
33131 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33132 the cursor is in changed text.
33133 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33136 arg "changes-merge"
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33144 \begin_inset Index idx
33147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 \begin_layout Standard
33157 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33163 \begin_layout Standard
33164 \begin_inset Graphics
33165 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33173 \begin_layout Standard
33174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33185 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 \begin_inset Tabular
33193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33194 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33195 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 arg "changes-track"
33214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33225 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 arg "changes-output"
33253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33261 \begin_inset space ~
33264 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33266 \begin_inset space ~
33270 \begin_inset space ~
33274 \begin_inset space ~
33283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 Jumps to the next change
33310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 arg "change-accept"
33327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33338 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33358 arg "change-reject"
33366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33377 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 arg "changes-merge"
33405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33416 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33418 \begin_inset space ~
33427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33436 arg "all-changes-accept"
33444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33452 \begin_inset space ~
33455 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33479 arg "all-changes-reject"
33487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33493 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33495 \begin_inset space ~
33498 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33500 \begin_inset space ~
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33537 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 \begin_inset space ~
33559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33600 \begin_layout Standard
33601 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33628 \begin_layout Standard
33629 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33630 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33631 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33632 the next change after the current cursor position.
33633 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33634 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33635 step to the next change.
33636 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33639 \begin_layout Standard
33640 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33641 to describe a change.
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33650 \begin_inset Index idx
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33654 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33660 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33667 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33670 \begin_layout Section
33671 Comparison of Documents
33672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33674 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33679 \begin_inset Index idx
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33683 Comparison of documents
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33692 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33694 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33698 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33700 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33701 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33705 \begin_inset space ~
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33713 \begin_inset space ~
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33742 \begin_inset space ~
33747 enables the change tracking option
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33763 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33766 \begin_layout Section
33767 International Support
33768 \begin_inset Index idx
33771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33772 International support
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33781 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33782 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33783 up LyX to use them:
33784 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33786 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33794 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33801 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33808 \begin_layout Subsection
33810 \begin_inset Index idx
33813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33820 \begin_inset Index idx
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 Document ! Settings
33830 \begin_inset Index idx
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 Document ! Language
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33845 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33846 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33849 dialog lets you set
33851 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33856 \begin_layout Standard
33861 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33870 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33871 For details about the different encoding options see section
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33878 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33885 \begin_layout Subsection
33886 Keyboard mapping configuration
33887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33889 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 If you have for example a U.
33898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33901 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33902 can use an alternate keymap.
33903 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33904 use an Italian keymap.
33907 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33908 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33909 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33912 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33913 \begin_inset space ~
33917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33919 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33924 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33925 which one you want to use.
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33929 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33930 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33931 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33935 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33936 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33937 one to support the characters you want.
33938 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33945 \begin_layout Chapter
33948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33950 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33957 \begin_layout Standard
33958 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33959 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33960 topic inside the user's guide.
33963 \begin_layout Section
33965 \begin_inset Index idx
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33977 \begin_layout Standard
33982 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33985 \begin_layout Subsection
33989 \begin_layout Standard
33990 Creates a new document.
33993 \begin_layout Subsection
33997 \begin_layout Standard
33998 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33999 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34000 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34003 \begin_layout Subsection
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34011 \begin_layout Subsection
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34017 Click there on a file to open it.
34020 \begin_layout Subsection
34024 \begin_layout Standard
34025 Closes the current document.
34028 \begin_layout Subsection
34032 \begin_layout Standard
34033 Closes all opened documents.
34036 \begin_layout Subsection
34040 \begin_layout Standard
34041 Saves the actual document.
34044 \begin_layout Subsection
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34052 \begin_layout Subsection
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34057 Saves all opened documents.
34060 \begin_layout Subsection
34064 \begin_layout Standard
34065 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34068 \begin_layout Subsection
34072 \begin_layout Standard
34073 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34074 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34075 It is described in the section
34077 Version Control in LyX
34081 Additional Features
34086 \begin_layout Subsection
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34091 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34092 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34094 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34097 \begin_layout Standard
34098 When using the menu entry
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34106 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34114 \begin_inset space ~
34118 \begin_inset space ~
34123 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34124 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34127 \begin_layout Subsection
34129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34139 You can export your document to various file formats.
34140 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34141 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34142 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34145 \begin_layout Standard
34146 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34154 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34161 \begin_layout Description
34167 \begin_inset space ~
34174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34181 yX format of the special LyX
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34185 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34186 \begin_inset Newline newline
34189 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34192 \begin_layout Description
34193 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34199 \begin_layout Description
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34204 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34210 \begin_layout Description
34211 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34212 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34213 files paths or file names in your document.
34214 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34221 \begin_layout Description
34222 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34223 in files paths or file names
34226 \begin_layout Description
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34242 eX) DVI-format using the program
34246 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34257 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34265 \begin_layout Description
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34270 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34274 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34279 \begin_layout Description
34280 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34284 \begin_layout Description
34286 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34293 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34297 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34305 \begin_layout Description
34312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34344 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34349 \begin_layout Description
34356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34364 \begin_inset space ~
34369 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34370 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34374 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34377 \begin_layout Description
34384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34397 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34398 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34406 \begin_layout Description
34413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34421 \begin_inset space ~
34432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34450 \begin_layout Description
34452 \begin_inset space ~
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34474 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34475 music notation software
34480 \begin_layout Description
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34501 \begin_inset space ~
34504 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34505 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34506 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34509 \begin_layout Description
34516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34526 \begin_inset space ~
34529 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34545 represent the version number)
34548 \begin_layout Description
34555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34564 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34567 \begin_layout Description
34568 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34573 \begin_layout Description
34574 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34576 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34579 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34583 \begin_layout Description
34587 \begin_inset space ~
34592 PDF-format using the program
34596 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34599 \begin_layout Description
34603 \begin_inset space ~
34610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 PDF-format using the program
34623 , produces PDF-files directly
34626 \begin_layout Description
34630 \begin_inset space ~
34635 PDF-format using the program
34639 , produces PDF-files directly
34642 \begin_layout Description
34646 \begin_inset space ~
34651 PDF-format using the program
34655 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34658 \begin_layout Description
34662 \begin_inset space ~
34669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34678 PDF-format using the program
34682 , produces PDF-files directly
34685 \begin_layout Description
34689 \begin_inset space ~
34697 \begin_layout Description
34701 \begin_inset space ~
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34710 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34711 and then exported as text using the program
34716 \begin_layout Description
34721 PostScript format using the program
34726 \begin_layout Description
34727 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34728 programming language
34741 it is possible to use
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 If one of the menu entries
34756 \begin_inset space ~
34765 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34766 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34773 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34778 \begin_inset Index idx
34781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34782 Reconfiguration of LyX
34790 \begin_layout Subsection
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34796 format or send it to a printer.
34797 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34798 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34804 For more information have a look at section
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34811 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34818 \begin_layout Subsection
34822 \begin_layout Standard
34823 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34824 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34825 prefix, see section
34826 \begin_inset space ~
34830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34832 reference "sec:Paths"
34837 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34846 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34847 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34848 \begin_inset space ~
34852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34854 reference "sub:Converters"
34861 \begin_layout Subsection
34862 New and Close Window
34865 \begin_layout Standard
34866 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34869 \begin_layout Subsection
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34874 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34877 \begin_layout Section
34879 \begin_inset Index idx
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34891 \begin_layout Subsection
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34896 Described in section
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34903 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34910 \begin_layout Subsection
34911 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34914 \begin_layout Standard
34915 Described in section
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34922 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34929 \begin_layout Subsection
34933 \begin_layout Standard
34934 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34935 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34938 \begin_layout Subsection
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34943 Selects the whole document.
34946 \begin_layout Subsection
34947 Find & Replace (Quick)
34950 \begin_layout Standard
34951 Described in section
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34958 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34965 \begin_layout Subsection
34966 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34969 \begin_layout Standard
34970 Described in section
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34977 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34984 \begin_layout Subsection
34985 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34988 \begin_layout Standard
34989 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34993 \begin_layout Subsection
34997 \begin_layout Standard
34998 Described in section
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35005 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35012 \begin_layout Subsection
35014 \begin_inset Index idx
35017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35018 Paragraph ! Settings
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35027 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35028 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35032 \begin_layout Standard
35033 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35034 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35040 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35041 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35043 \begin_inset space ~
35051 \begin_layout Subsection
35055 \begin_layout Standard
35056 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35057 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35058 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35065 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35066 The properties of tables are described in section
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35073 reference "sec:Tables"
35077 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35084 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35091 \begin_layout Subsection
35092 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35098 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35105 reference "sec:Nesting"
35110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35112 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35119 \begin_layout Section
35121 \begin_inset Index idx
35124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35133 \begin_layout Standard
35134 At the bottom of the
35138 menu the opened documents are listed.
35141 \begin_layout Subsection
35142 Open/Close all Insets
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35149 \begin_layout Subsection
35150 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35153 \begin_layout Standard
35154 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35158 Math macros are described in the
35165 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35177 reference "sec:Navigating"
35182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35184 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35191 \begin_layout Subsection
35195 \begin_layout Standard
35196 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35204 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35211 \begin_layout Subsection
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35216 Opens a window showing console messages.
35217 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35221 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35222 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35225 \begin_layout Subsection
35227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35229 name "sub:Toolbars"
35234 \begin_inset Index idx
35237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35246 \begin_layout Standard
35247 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35248 All toolbars and the
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35256 can be turned on and off.
35261 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35290 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35294 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35306 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35310 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35311 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35312 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35313 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35314 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35318 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35325 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35332 \begin_layout Subsection
35336 \begin_layout Standard
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35360 \begin_inset space ~
35365 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35376 \begin_inset space ~
35380 \begin_inset space ~
35384 \begin_inset space ~
35388 \begin_inset space ~
35393 will split it horizontally.
35394 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35395 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35396 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35397 three or more documents at the same time.
35398 To close a split view, use the menu
35401 \begin_inset space ~
35405 \begin_inset space ~
35413 \begin_layout Subsection
35417 \begin_layout Standard
35418 Closes a split view.
35421 \begin_layout Subsection
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35426 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35427 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35428 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35429 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35430 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35433 \begin_layout Section
35435 \begin_inset Index idx
35438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35452 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35453 \begin_inset space ~
35457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35459 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35470 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35474 name "sub:Special-Character"
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 Here you can insert the following characters:
35485 \begin_layout Description
35490 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35492 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35493 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35494 You can get a complete display by checking
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset Newline newline
35507 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35515 Not all characters will be visible in the
35519 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35527 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35531 ) can display every character.
35539 \begin_layout Description
35540 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35544 \begin_layout Description
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35553 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35560 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35567 \begin_layout Description
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35572 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35575 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35576 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35582 \begin_layout Description
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35587 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35590 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35591 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35597 \begin_layout Description
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35602 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35606 \begin_layout Description
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35611 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35615 \begin_layout Description
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35620 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35626 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35632 \begin_layout Description
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35637 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35641 \begin_layout Description
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35647 \begin_inset Index idx
35650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35657 \begin_inset Index idx
35660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35661 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35666 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35667 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35669 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35674 \begin_inset Index idx
35677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35684 \begin_inset Newline newline
35687 More information about this feature can be found in the
35693 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35699 \begin_layout Subsection
35703 \begin_layout Standard
35704 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35707 \begin_layout Description
35708 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35709 \begin_inset script superscript
35711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 \begin_layout Description
35721 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35722 \begin_inset script subscript
35724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35733 \begin_layout Description
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35738 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35745 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35752 \begin_layout Description
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35757 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35764 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35771 \begin_layout Description
35773 \begin_inset space ~
35776 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35783 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35790 \begin_layout Description
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35795 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35801 \begin_inset space \space{}
35804 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35805 An example from the LyX
35810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35813 To insert a fraction use the command
35818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35822 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35831 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35838 \begin_layout Description
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35843 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35850 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35857 \begin_layout Description
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35862 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35869 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35876 \begin_layout Description
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35881 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35888 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35895 \begin_layout Description
35896 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35903 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35910 \begin_layout Description
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35915 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35922 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35929 \begin_layout Description
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35934 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35941 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35948 \begin_layout Description
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35957 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35964 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35971 \begin_layout Description
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35976 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35977 as described in section
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35984 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35991 \begin_layout Description
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35996 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36003 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36010 \begin_layout Description
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36015 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36016 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36024 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36031 \begin_layout Description
36033 \begin_inset space ~
36036 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36043 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36050 \begin_layout Description
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36059 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36060 \begin_inset space ~
36064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36066 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36073 \begin_layout Subsection
36077 \begin_layout Standard
36078 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36103 are described in section
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36110 reference "sec:toc"
36119 is described in section
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36126 reference "sec:Index"
36134 is described in section
36135 \begin_inset space ~
36139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36141 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36147 BibTeX Bibliography
36149 is described in section
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36156 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36163 \begin_layout Subsection
36167 \begin_layout Standard
36168 To insert floats, as described in section
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36175 reference "sec:Floats"
36179 and in detail the chapter
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36194 \begin_layout Subsection
36198 \begin_layout Standard
36199 To insert notes, described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "sec:Notes"
36213 \begin_layout Subsection
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36218 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36220 Branches are described in section
36221 \begin_inset space ~
36225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36227 reference "sec:Branches"
36234 \begin_layout Subsection
36238 \begin_layout Standard
36239 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36240 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36242 An example is the document class
36243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36250 with three custom insets.
36253 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36257 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36263 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36266 \begin_layout Subsection
36268 \begin_inset Index idx
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36283 For more information see chapter
36285 External Document Parts
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36294 \begin_layout Subsection
36296 \begin_inset Index idx
36299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36310 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36325 \begin_layout Subsection
36329 \begin_layout Standard
36334 dialog as described in section
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36341 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36348 \begin_layout Subsection
36352 \begin_layout Standard
36357 as described in section
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36364 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36371 \begin_layout Subsection
36375 \begin_layout Standard
36380 as described in section
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36387 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36394 \begin_layout Subsection
36396 \begin_inset Index idx
36399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36406 \begin_inset Index idx
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36410 Longtables ! Caption
36418 \begin_layout Standard
36419 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36420 Floats are described in section
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36427 reference "sec:Floats"
36431 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36446 \begin_layout Subsection
36450 \begin_layout Standard
36451 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36458 reference "sec:Index"
36465 \begin_layout Subsection
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36470 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36477 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36484 \begin_layout Subsection
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36489 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36490 Tables are described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sec:Tables"
36501 and in detail in the chapter
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36516 \begin_layout Subsection
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36526 Graphics are described in section
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36533 reference "sec:Graphics"
36540 \begin_layout Subsection
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36545 Inserts a URL as described in section
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "sub:URLs"
36559 \begin_layout Subsection
36563 \begin_layout Standard
36564 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36578 \begin_layout Subsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36583 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36590 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36597 \begin_layout Subsection
36601 \begin_layout Standard
36602 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36609 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36616 \begin_layout Subsection
36620 \begin_layout Standard
36621 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36622 title or caption of a float.
36623 Inserts a short title as described in section
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36630 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36637 \begin_layout Subsection
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36642 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36649 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36656 \begin_layout Subsection
36658 \begin_inset Index idx
36661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36670 \begin_layout Standard
36671 Inserts a program listings box.
36672 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36674 Program Code Listings
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 Inserts the actual date.
36693 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36695 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36711 \begin_layout Subsection
36715 \begin_layout Standard
36716 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36723 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36730 \begin_layout Section
36732 \begin_inset Index idx
36735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36744 \begin_layout Standard
36745 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36749 of the current document.
36750 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36753 \begin_layout Subsection
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36758 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36759 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36760 to jump, for example, between section
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36765 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36769 2.5 and use the submenu
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_inset space ~
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset space ~
36799 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36803 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36809 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36812 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36815 \begin_layout Standard
36816 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36820 \begin_inset space ~
36825 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36833 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36841 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36845 \begin_layout Subsection
36849 \begin_layout Standard
36850 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36851 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36852 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36876 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36891 manual for a detailed description.
36894 \begin_layout Section
36896 \begin_inset Index idx
36899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36908 \begin_layout Subsection
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36913 Change Tracking is described in section
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36920 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36927 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36945 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36946 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36947 to the clipboard or update the view.
36948 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36952 Start Appendix Here
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36957 as described in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Appendices"
36971 \begin_layout Subsection
36973 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_layout Standard
36980 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36981 default output format for the document (menu
36983 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36984 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36985 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37003 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37007 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37009 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37010 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37015 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37020 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37022 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37038 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37042 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37043 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37045 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37046 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37056 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37066 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37071 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37072 The default output format is
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37083 \begin_layout Subsection
37084 View (Other Formats)
37087 \begin_layout Standard
37088 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37089 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37090 actual document with an external program.
37091 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37092 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37093 All possible formats are listed in section
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37100 reference "sub:Export"
37105 You should at least see the menu entry
37110 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37111 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37118 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37123 \begin_inset Index idx
37126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37127 Reconfiguration of LyX
37135 \begin_layout Standard
37136 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37137 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37139 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37140 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37145 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37150 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37160 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37165 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37168 \begin_layout Subsection
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37178 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37181 \begin_layout Subsection
37182 Update (Other Formats)
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37186 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37187 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37190 \begin_layout Subsection
37191 View Master Document
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37195 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37216 manual for more information on this topic).
37217 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37218 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37231 generates the output of the whole book, while
37235 will just output the chapter alone.
37238 \begin_layout Standard
37239 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37240 in the document settings (menu
37242 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37243 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37244 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37266 ) or in the preferences (menu
37268 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37269 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37274 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37279 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37281 \begin_inset space ~
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37297 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37304 \begin_layout Subsection
37305 Update Master Document
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37330 manual for more information on this topic).
37331 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37332 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37335 \begin_layout Standard
37336 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37337 in the document settings (menu
37339 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37340 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37341 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37359 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37363 ) or in the preferences (menu
37365 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37366 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37371 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37373 \begin_inset space ~
37376 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37394 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37401 \begin_layout Subsection
37405 \begin_layout Standard
37406 Un/compresses the current document.
37409 \begin_layout Subsection
37413 \begin_layout Standard
37414 The document settings are described in appendix
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37421 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37428 \begin_layout Section
37430 \begin_inset Index idx
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 Spell checking is explained in section
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37454 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37461 \begin_layout Subsection
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 The thesaurus is described in section
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37473 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37482 \begin_inset Index idx
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37492 \begin_inset Index idx
37495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37504 \begin_layout Standard
37505 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37506 the highlighted document part.
37509 \begin_layout Subsection
37514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37522 \begin_inset Index idx
37525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37534 \begin_layout Standard
37535 Generates with the help of the program
37539 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37540 This feature is not available on Windows.
37543 \begin_layout Subsection
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37556 \begin_inset Index idx
37559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37568 \begin_layout Standard
37569 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37579 to see the full filename paths.
37582 \begin_layout Subsection
37584 \begin_inset Index idx
37587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37596 \begin_layout Standard
37597 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37604 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37611 \begin_layout Subsection
37613 \begin_inset Index idx
37616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37617 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37628 Reconfiguration of LyX
37632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37645 \begin_inset Index idx
37648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37649 Reconfiguration of LyX
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37659 needs; see also section
37660 \begin_inset space ~
37664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37666 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37673 \begin_layout Subsection
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37682 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37696 \begin_layout Section
37698 \begin_inset Index idx
37701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37710 \begin_layout Standard
37711 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37713 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37726 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37727 found by LyX (see also section
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37734 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37741 \begin_layout Standard
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37765 \begin_layout Section
37767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37769 name "sec:Toolbars"
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37784 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37793 This is described in the
37795 Additional Features
37800 \begin_layout Subsection
37802 \begin_inset Index idx
37805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37814 \begin_layout Standard
37815 \begin_inset Graphics
37816 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37849 \begin_inset Note Note
37852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37858 manual for more information.
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 \begin_inset Tabular
37875 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37876 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37877 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37878 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37884 \begin_inset Graphics
37885 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 pull-down box for the environments
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37921 \begin_inset Tabular
37922 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37923 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37924 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37925 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37949 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38009 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 arg "dialog-show print"
38033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38055 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38099 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38189 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38235 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38249 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38268 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38331 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38332 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 Emphasize text, function of the
38362 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38367 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 Set text to noun style, function of the
38399 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38404 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38422 arg "textstyle-apply"
38430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38434 Format text using the current settings in the
38436 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38441 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38474 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38476 \begin_inset space ~
38485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 arg "tabular-insert"
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 Toggle outline window on/off,
38566 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38621 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38634 \begin_layout Subsection
38636 \begin_inset Index idx
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38648 \begin_layout Standard
38649 \begin_inset Graphics
38650 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38658 \begin_layout Standard
38659 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38665 \begin_layout Standard
38666 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38671 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38677 \begin_layout Standard
38678 \begin_inset Tabular
38679 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38680 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38681 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38682 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 arg "layout Enumerate"
38727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38746 arg "layout Itemize"
38754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 arg "layout Description"
38808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 arg "depth-increment"
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 arg "depth-decrement"
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38903 arg "float-insert figure"
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38917 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38918 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 arg "float-insert table"
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38949 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39039 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39069 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39089 arg "nomencl-insert"
39097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39105 \begin_inset space ~
39114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39123 arg "footnote-insert"
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39202 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 \begin_inset space ~
39224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39277 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39357 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39388 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39390 \begin_inset space ~
39399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39408 arg "dialog-show character"
39416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39422 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39427 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39443 arg "layout-paragraph"
39451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39459 \begin_inset space ~
39468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39477 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39491 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39505 \begin_layout Subsection
39506 View/Update Toolbar
39507 \begin_inset Index idx
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 Toolbar ! View / Update
39519 \begin_layout Standard
39520 \begin_inset Graphics
39521 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39528 \begin_layout Standard
39529 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39536 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39540 \begin_layout Standard
39541 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39547 \begin_layout Standard
39548 \begin_inset Tabular
39549 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39550 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39551 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39552 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39576 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 arg "buffer-update"
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 arg "master-buffer-view"
39630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 arg "master-buffer-update"
39664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39670 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39709 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39710 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39711 Synchronize with Output
39717 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 \begin_inset Graphics
39723 filename ../images/view-others.png
39725 groupId toolbarbuttons
39736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39742 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39743 View (Other Formats)
39749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 \begin_inset Graphics
39755 filename ../images/update-others.png
39757 groupId toolbarbuttons
39766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39772 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39773 Update (Other Formats)
39786 \begin_layout Standard
39787 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39791 \begin_layout Subsection
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39796 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39803 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39807 , the table toolbar
39808 \begin_inset Index idx
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39825 manual and the math macro toolbar
39826 \begin_inset Index idx
39829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39842 \begin_layout Chapter
39843 The Document Settings
39844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39846 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39851 \begin_inset Index idx
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39855 Document ! Settings
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39872 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39873 is called with the menu
39875 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39879 You can save your document settings as default with the
39881 Save as Document Defaults
39883 button in any dialog.
39884 This will create a template named
39888 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39892 \begin_layout Standard
39897 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39898 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39903 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39904 to find the one you are looking for.
39905 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39906 the submenus of the dialog.
39908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39912 \begin_inset space \space{}
39916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39923 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39924 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39925 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39928 \begin_layout Section
39932 \begin_layout Standard
39933 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39935 Document classes are described in section
39936 \begin_inset space ~
39940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39942 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39950 \begin_layout Standard
39954 \begin_inset space ~
39959 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39963 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39964 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39966 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39975 \begin_layout Standard
39976 Some classes use special class options by default.
39977 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39981 and you can decide to use them or not.
39982 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39983 recommended you leave them untouched.
39988 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39993 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39994 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40000 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40001 \begin_inset Newline newline
40006 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40009 \begin_inset Newline newline
40012 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40018 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40020 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40037 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40038 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40039 document is opened without its master.
40040 This way child documents are always compilable.
40041 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40057 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40067 \begin_inset Index idx
40070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40071 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40077 \begin_inset Index idx
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40081 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40086 for cross-references, see section
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40093 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40100 \begin_layout Section
40104 \begin_layout Standard
40105 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40106 Please refer to the section
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40122 manual for details.
40125 \begin_layout Section
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40130 Modules are explained in section
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40137 reference "sub:Modules"
40144 \begin_layout Section
40148 \begin_layout Standard
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40156 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40163 \begin_layout Section
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 The document font settings are described in section
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40175 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40182 \begin_layout Section
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40187 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40204 and whether it should be a
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40212 can also be specified here.
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40218 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40220 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40223 \begin_layout Section
40227 \begin_layout Standard
40228 This dialog is described in sections
40229 \begin_inset space ~
40233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40235 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40242 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40249 \begin_layout Section
40253 \begin_layout Standard
40254 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40261 reference "sub:Margins"
40268 \begin_layout Section
40270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40272 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40277 \begin_inset Index idx
40280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40281 Language ! Encoding
40289 \begin_layout Standard
40290 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40291 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40292 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40293 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40294 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40295 known for a particular character).
40299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40300 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40305 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40310 manual for details.
40318 \begin_layout Standard
40319 If you use the option
40323 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40324 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40325 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40326 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40327 exactly one encoding.
40328 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40331 \begin_layout Standard
40332 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40333 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40334 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40335 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40336 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40337 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40342 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40343 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40344 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40345 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40346 engines to standard LaTeX.
40347 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40348 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40401 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40406 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40410 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40413 \begin_layout Standard
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40422 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40432 The possible settings are:
40435 \begin_layout Description
40436 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40438 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40439 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40449 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40456 \begin_layout Description
40457 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40458 format you will use.
40459 In many cases this will be
40464 \begin_inset Index idx
40467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40474 If the newer package
40479 \begin_inset Index idx
40482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40483 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40488 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40489 this package will be used instead of
40496 \begin_layout Description
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40509 would be more appropriate.
40512 \begin_layout Description
40513 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40514 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40518 (for German texts), type in
40521 \begin_inset Newline newline
40526 usepackage{ngerman}
40529 \begin_layout Description
40530 None will not use a language package.
40531 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40538 \begin_layout Description
40540 \begin_inset space ~
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40555 , but the LaTeX-package
40560 \begin_inset Index idx
40563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40564 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40570 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40571 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40572 languages in TeX code.
40575 \begin_layout Description
40576 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40577 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40578 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40581 \begin_layout Description
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40590 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40593 \begin_layout Description
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40602 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40605 \begin_layout Description
40607 \begin_inset space ~
40610 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40613 \begin_layout Description
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40622 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40623 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40626 \begin_layout Description
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40635 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40639 \begin_layout Description
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40648 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40649 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40652 \begin_layout Description
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40658 \begin_inset space ~
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40665 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_layout Description
40674 \begin_inset space ~
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40685 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40686 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40689 \begin_layout Description
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40698 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40699 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40700 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_layout Description
40713 \begin_inset space ~
40717 \begin_inset space ~
40720 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40721 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40722 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40723 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_layout Description
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40743 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40746 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40755 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40758 \begin_layout Description
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40767 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40770 \begin_layout Description
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40775 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40778 \begin_layout Description
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40783 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40786 \begin_layout Description
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40795 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40798 \begin_layout Description
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_layout Description
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset space ~
40819 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40822 \begin_layout Description
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40834 \begin_layout Description
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40843 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40848 \begin_inset Index idx
40851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40852 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40857 , when using this, set the document language to
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40871 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40875 , when using this, set the document language to
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_layout Description
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40893 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40898 \begin_inset Index idx
40901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40907 , when using this, set the document language to
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40921 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40925 , when using this, set the document language to
40930 \begin_layout Description
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40939 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40943 , when using this, set the document language to
40948 \begin_layout Description
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40953 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40969 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40972 \begin_layout Description
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40985 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40986 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40987 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40990 \begin_layout Description
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41012 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41024 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41029 \begin_inset Index idx
41032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41038 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41041 \begin_layout Description
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41050 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41058 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41063 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41065 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41068 \begin_layout Description
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41077 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41082 \begin_inset Index idx
41085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41086 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41091 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41094 \begin_layout Description
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41099 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41104 \begin_inset Index idx
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41108 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41114 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41118 \begin_layout Description
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41131 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_layout Description
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41152 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41153 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41157 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41171 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41174 \begin_layout Section
41176 \begin_inset Index idx
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 \begin_inset Index idx
41189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41196 \begin_inset Index idx
41199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 Color ! Shaded boxes
41206 \begin_inset Index idx
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41210 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41218 \begin_layout Standard
41219 Here you can alter the font color for the
41223 (default: black), for
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41231 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41235 (default: white) and for
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41248 sets the color back to the default.
41251 \begin_layout Standard
41252 Clicking any button showing
41260 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41261 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41262 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41263 later more quickly.
41266 \begin_layout Standard
41267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 out note appears blue in the output.)
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 Note, if you change the
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41293 font color and use the option
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41301 in the document settings under
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41309 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41316 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41324 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41330 \begin_layout Standard
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41343 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41348 Code after a forced page break:
41351 \begin_layout Itemize
41352 For the page color:
41353 \begin_inset Newline newline
41360 pagecolor{color name}
41363 \begin_layout Itemize
41364 For the text color:
41365 \begin_inset Newline newline
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41376 You are restricted to one of
41412 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_inset Newline newline
41428 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41429 names to refer to them:
41432 \begin_layout Itemize
41438 \begin_inset Newline newline
41443 page_backgroundcolor
41446 \begin_layout Itemize
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41456 \begin_inset Newline newline
41464 \begin_layout Itemize
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_inset Newline newline
41482 \begin_layout Itemize
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \begin_inset Newline newline
41500 \begin_layout Standard
41501 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41505 Cells of the Embedded
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41512 \begin_layout Section
41516 \begin_layout Standard
41517 Here you can adjust the
41521 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41525 as described in section
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41532 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41539 \begin_layout Section
41543 \begin_layout Standard
41544 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41549 \begin_inset Index idx
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41563 \begin_inset Index idx
41566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41575 Sectioned bibliography
41577 using the LaTeX package
41582 \begin_inset Index idx
41585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41586 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41591 and you can select a
41595 for the generation of the bibliography.
41596 For a further description see section
41597 \begin_inset space ~
41601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41603 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41610 \begin_layout Section
41614 \begin_layout Standard
41615 Here you can define the
41619 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41627 reference "sec:Index"
41634 \begin_layout Section
41638 \begin_layout Standard
41639 The PDF properties are explained in section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41646 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41653 \begin_layout Section
41657 \begin_layout Standard
41658 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41663 \begin_inset Index idx
41666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41667 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41677 \begin_inset Index idx
41680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41681 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41691 \begin_inset Index idx
41694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41705 \begin_inset Index idx
41708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41709 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41714 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41717 \begin_layout Description
41718 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41719 ensure that you have enabled
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_layout Description
41731 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_layout Description
41747 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41758 \begin_layout Description
41759 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41761 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41770 \begin_layout Section
41774 \begin_layout Standard
41775 The float placement options are described in the section
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41794 \begin_layout Section
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41799 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41801 Program Code Listings
41806 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_layout Section
41818 \begin_layout Standard
41819 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41827 set to be used and set the
41832 The itemize environment is described in section
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41839 reference "sec:Itemize"
41846 \begin_layout Standard
41847 You can furthermore specify a
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41855 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41856 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41863 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41869 \begin_inset space \space{}
41873 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41883 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41884 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41887 \begin_layout Standard
41888 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41896 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41899 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41900 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41908 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41912 usepackage{textcomp}
41915 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41919 usepackage{amssymb}
41929 \begin_layout Section
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41934 Branches are described in section
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41941 reference "sec:Branches"
41948 \begin_layout Section
41950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41952 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41963 \begin_layout Description
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41972 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41992 View Master Document
41993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42000 Update Master Document
42001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42008 menu or the toolbar.
42009 The default is set in
42011 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42012 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42014 \begin_inset space ~
42017 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42027 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42034 \begin_layout Description
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42040 \begin_inset space ~
42043 Output settings for the menu
42045 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42053 For a detailed description see section
42055 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42068 \begin_layout Description
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42077 Options offers settings for the export format
42083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42101 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42102 \begin_inset space ~
42105 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42114 settings are described in detail in section
42116 Math Output in XHTML
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42130 \begin_inset space ~
42134 \begin_inset space ~
42139 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42142 \begin_layout Section
42147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42157 \begin_layout Standard
42158 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42159 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42160 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42161 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42165 \begin_layout Standard
42166 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42173 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42180 \begin_layout Chapter
42186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42188 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42193 \begin_inset Index idx
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 \begin_layout Standard
42206 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42208 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42212 It has the following submenus.
42215 \begin_layout Section
42219 \begin_layout Subsection
42223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42224 User Interface File
42225 \begin_inset Index idx
42228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42229 Customization ! of toolbars
42235 \begin_inset Index idx
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42239 Customization ! of menus
42247 \begin_layout Standard
42248 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42249 interface (ui) file.
42250 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42258 \begin_layout Description
42263 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42266 \begin_layout Description
42273 the menu entries in popup context menus
42276 \begin_layout Description
42281 specifies the toolbar buttons
42284 \begin_layout Standard
42285 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42286 and edit the entries.
42289 \begin_layout Standard
42290 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42302 entries must be finished with an explicit
42327 and in the case of the
42328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42340 The syntax for the entries is:
42343 \begin_layout Standard
42344 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42372 \begin_layout Standard
42374 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42377 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42379 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42401 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42407 \begin_layout Standard
42408 For example, assuming you use the menu
42410 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42413 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42417 \begin_layout Standard
42418 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42442 \begin_layout Standard
42444 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42459 to have the sixth bookmark.
42462 \begin_layout Standard
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42471 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42472 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42476 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42490 Enable tool tips in main work area
42492 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42500 \begin_layout Standard
42503 Restore window layouts and geometries
42505 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42506 in the last LyX session.
42509 \begin_layout Standard
42512 Restore cursor positions
42514 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42518 \begin_layout Standard
42521 Load opened files from last session
42523 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42526 \begin_layout Standard
42529 Clear all session information
42531 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42532 of last opened documents, etc.).
42535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42539 name "sub:Backup documents"
42544 \begin_inset Index idx
42547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 \begin_layout Standard
42559 Backup original documents when saving
42561 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42562 it was saved the last time.
42563 It is stored in the
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42578 reference "sec:Paths"
42582 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42591 The backup file has the file extension
42592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42606 \begin_layout Standard
42609 Backup documents, every
42611 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42617 Save documents compressed by default
42619 always saves files in a compressed format.
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42627 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42630 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42640 \begin_layout Standard
42643 Open documents in tabs
42645 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42648 \begin_layout Standard
42653 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42665 reference "sec:Paths"
42669 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42675 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42677 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42683 Single close-tab button
42685 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42688 \begin_inset Graphics
42689 filename ../images/closetab.png
42696 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42697 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42700 \begin_layout Standard
42701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42717 \begin_layout Subsection
42719 \begin_inset Index idx
42722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42731 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42738 \begin_layout Standard
42739 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42742 \begin_layout Standard
42743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42751 This section only deals with the fonts
42756 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42760 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42772 By default, LyX uses
42788 (depends on the system) as its
42791 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42808 You can change the font size with the
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42820 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42825 points have the size of 1
42826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42836 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42841 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42846 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42847 \begin_inset space ~
42851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42853 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42860 \begin_layout Standard
42863 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42865 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42866 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42867 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42868 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42870 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_layout Subsection
42879 \begin_inset Index idx
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42889 \begin_inset Index idx
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42901 \begin_layout Standard
42902 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42903 the list and selecting the
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 By checking the option
42915 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42918 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42923 \begin_inset space ~
42928 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42931 \begin_layout Subsection
42933 \begin_inset Index idx
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42946 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42954 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42955 This feature is described in section
42956 \begin_inset space ~
42960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42962 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42969 \begin_layout Standard
42970 Checking the option
42973 \begin_inset space ~
42977 \begin_inset space ~
42981 \begin_inset space ~
42986 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42989 \begin_layout Section
42991 \begin_inset Index idx
42994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43003 \begin_layout Subsection
43007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43014 Cursor follows scrollbar
43016 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43022 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43023 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43029 Scroll below end of document
43031 is self-explanatory.
43034 \begin_layout Standard
43035 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43042 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43044 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43045 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43051 Sort environments alphabetically
43053 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43059 Group environments by their category
43061 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43069 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43090 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43091 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43095 \begin_layout Subsection
43097 \begin_inset Index idx
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43107 \begin_inset Index idx
43110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 Settings ! Shortcuts
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43124 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43125 Several binding files are available, among them:
43128 \begin_layout Description
43129 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43132 \begin_layout Description
43133 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43145 \begin_layout Description
43146 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43158 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43163 , and binding files for special languages.
43164 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43169 \begin_inset space \space{}
43173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43181 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43185 \begin_layout Standard
43186 Some binding files, like
43190 , only have a limited scope.
43191 When looking at the end of the file
43195 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43198 \begin_layout Standard
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43211 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43212 in the selected key binding file.
43215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43219 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43224 \begin_inset Index idx
43227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43228 Key Bindings ! Editing
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43238 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43239 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43242 Show key-bindings containing
43245 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43246 Insert there for example as keyword
43247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43254 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43255 functions that contain
43256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43264 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43265 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43269 that you will find in the
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 For example, to add the shortcut
43285 , select the function and press the
43290 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43291 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43294 \begin_layout Standard
43295 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43296 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43297 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43298 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43299 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43309 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43311 The syntax of the entries is:
43314 \begin_layout Standard
43320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43338 \begin_layout Subsection
43340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43342 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43347 \begin_inset Index idx
43350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 \begin_inset Index idx
43360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43369 \begin_layout Standard
43370 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43371 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43372 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43373 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43385 and select the keyboard map file named
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43401 keyboard map and, if you use the
43405 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43408 arg "keymap-primary"
43414 arg "keymap-secondary"
43417 respectively or toggle between them with
43420 arg "keymap-toggle"
43426 \begin_layout Standard
43427 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43435 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43445 You can also specify the mouse
43447 Wheel scrolling speed
43450 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43454 \begin_layout Standard
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43471 you can select a key for zooming.
43472 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43475 \begin_layout Subsection
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43480 Input completion is described in section
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43487 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43494 \begin_layout Section
43496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43503 \begin_inset Index idx
43506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43513 \begin_inset Index idx
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43525 \begin_layout Standard
43526 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43528 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43531 \begin_layout Description
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43536 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43537 It is the default when you
43548 \begin_inset space ~
43556 \begin_layout Description
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43561 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43563 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_layout Description
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43582 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43588 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43592 \begin_inset Newline newline
43596 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43608 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43616 \begin_layout Description
43618 \begin_inset space ~
43622 \begin_inset Index idx
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43632 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43639 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43647 will be used to save the backups.
43648 \begin_inset Newline newline
43651 Backup files have the ending
43652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43662 \begin_layout Description
43667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43678 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43679 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43680 \begin_inset Newline newline
43687 You add a BibTeX-database
43692 You can edit this file with the program
43701 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43710 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43715 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43716 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43722 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43723 \begin_inset Newline newline
43726 The pipe is also used for the
43731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43737 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43742 \begin_inset Newline newline
43745 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43746 \begin_inset Newline newline
43762 \begin_layout Description
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43770 \begin_layout Description
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43775 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43776 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43777 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43780 \begin_layout Description
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43785 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43791 You only need to specify it if you are using
43795 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43801 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43805 \begin_layout Description
43807 \begin_inset space ~
43810 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43811 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43812 where to find it on the system.
43813 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43814 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43823 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43824 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43827 \begin_layout Description
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43832 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43833 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43835 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43837 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43838 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43839 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43840 scanned for the input files.
43841 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43842 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43843 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43844 compilation may fail for some documents.
43847 \begin_layout Section
43851 \begin_layout Standard
43852 Here you can insert your
43861 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43869 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43873 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43876 \begin_layout Section
43878 \begin_inset Index idx
43881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 Language ! Settings
43888 \begin_inset Index idx
43891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43892 Settings ! Language
43900 \begin_layout Subsection
43902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43904 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43911 \begin_layout Description
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43920 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43921 You can find its actual translation status here:
43922 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43924 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43931 \begin_layout Description
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43936 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43938 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43939 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43956 The most widespread language package is
43961 \begin_inset Index idx
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43970 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43971 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43972 alternative language package
43977 \begin_inset Index idx
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43981 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43986 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43987 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43993 The available selections are described in section
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44000 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44007 \begin_layout Description
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44012 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44013 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44014 An example is the start command
44020 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44040 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44055 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44056 command toggles the package on and off.
44059 \begin_layout Description
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44068 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44072 \begin_layout Description
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset space ~
44081 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44082 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44083 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44084 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44091 \begin_layout Description
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44096 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44098 When this option is not set, the
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44106 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44107 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44118 \begin_layout Description
44120 \begin_inset space ~
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44132 When it is not set, the
44135 \begin_inset space ~
44140 is set to the end of the document.
44143 \begin_layout Description
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44152 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44153 language will be underlined in blue.
44156 \begin_layout Description
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44165 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44166 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44169 \begin_layout Description
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44174 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44175 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44176 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44177 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44180 \begin_layout Subsection
44184 \begin_layout Standard
44185 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44192 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44199 \begin_layout Section
44203 \begin_layout Subsection
44207 \begin_layout Description
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44216 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44219 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44220 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44228 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44231 \begin_layout Description
44233 \begin_inset space ~
44237 \begin_inset Index idx
44240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 \begin_inset Index idx
44250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 Settings ! Date format
44256 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44257 \begin_inset Newline newline
44261 \begin_inset Flex URL
44264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44266 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44272 \begin_inset Newline newline
44275 For example the format
44276 \begin_inset Newline newline
44280 \begin_inset Newline newline
44283 prints the date as day/month/year.
44286 \begin_layout Description
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44295 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44298 \begin_layout Description
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44303 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44305 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44313 For a detailed description see section
44315 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_layout Subsection
44330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44337 \begin_inset Index idx
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 \begin_inset Index idx
44350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44359 \begin_layout Description
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44364 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44369 The name will be used when the
44374 \begin_inset Newline newline
44378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44386 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44394 \begin_layout Description
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44399 command is the command LyX
44400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44407 LaTeX uses for printing.
44415 \begin_layout Description
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44424 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44425 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44426 of the program that provides the
44433 \begin_layout Description
44435 \begin_inset space ~
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44443 \begin_inset space ~
44446 printer This option works only for the
44451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44463 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44464 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44467 \begin_layout Subsection
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44482 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44487 \begin_inset Index idx
44490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 \begin_layout Description
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44520 \begin_inset space ~
44523 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44528 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44549 are used for Cyrillic.
44550 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44563 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44564 LyX sets up in the background.
44565 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44568 \begin_layout Description
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44577 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44582 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44585 \begin_layout Description
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44591 \begin_inset space ~
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44602 options They only have an effect when the program
44606 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44609 \begin_layout Standard
44610 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44611 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44612 manuals of the applications.
44615 \begin_layout Description
44617 \begin_inset space ~
44620 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44621 \begin_inset space ~
44625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44627 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44634 \begin_layout Description
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44639 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44646 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44653 \begin_layout Description
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44658 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44665 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44672 \begin_layout Description
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44688 command Command for the program
44692 that is described in the section
44698 Additional Features
44703 \begin_layout Standard
44704 There are additionally the following options:
44707 \begin_layout Description
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44728 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44746 to separate folders.
44747 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44748 \begin_inset Index idx
44751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44758 \begin_inset Index idx
44761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 \begin_layout Description
44772 \begin_inset space ~
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44788 \begin_inset space ~
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44795 changes Removes all manually set
44801 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44802 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44809 dialog when changing the document class.
44812 \begin_layout Section
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44818 \begin_inset Index idx
44821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 \begin_layout Subsection
44832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44834 name "sub:Converters"
44839 \begin_inset Index idx
44842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44851 \begin_layout Standard
44852 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44853 from one format to another.
44854 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44855 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44862 \begin_inset space ~
44867 field and press the
44872 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44881 drop-down list, modify the
44885 field and press the
44892 \begin_layout Standard
44895 Converter File Cache
44901 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44903 Maximum Age (in days
44906 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44907 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44910 \begin_layout Standard
44911 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44912 definition, is described in the section
44923 \begin_layout Subsection
44925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44927 name "sec:File-Formats"
44932 \begin_inset Index idx
44935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 \begin_inset Index idx
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 \begin_layout Standard
44955 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44964 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44967 \begin_layout Standard
44968 You can also define the
44970 Default output format
44972 that is used when you use
44974 View, Update, View Master Document
44978 Update Master Document
44984 menu or the toolbar.
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44988 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44999 \begin_layout Standard
45000 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45001 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45002 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45003 This is done by specifying a
45008 More about this is described in the section
45019 \begin_layout Chapter
45020 Units available in LyX
45021 \begin_inset Index idx
45024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45033 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45040 \begin_layout Standard
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45048 reference "tab:Units"
45052 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45055 \begin_layout Standard
45056 \begin_inset Float table
45062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45081 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 \begin_inset Tabular
45090 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45091 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45092 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 scaled point (65536
45245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45305 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 % of original image width
45367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45574 \begin_layout Chapter
45576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45578 name "chap:Credits"
45585 \begin_layout Standard
45586 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45587 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45590 \begin_layout Itemize
45593 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45596 \begin_layout Itemize
45602 \begin_layout Itemize
45608 \begin_layout Itemize
45614 \begin_layout Itemize
45620 \begin_layout Itemize
45626 \begin_layout Itemize
45632 \begin_layout Itemize
45638 \begin_layout Itemize
45641 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45644 \begin_layout Itemize
45650 \begin_layout Itemize
45656 \begin_layout Itemize
45662 \begin_layout Itemize
45668 \begin_layout Itemize
45674 \begin_layout Itemize
45680 \begin_layout Itemize
45686 \begin_layout Itemize
45692 \begin_layout Itemize
45694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45703 \begin_layout Standard
45704 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45707 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45714 \begin_layout Bibliography
45715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45716 LatexCommand bibitem
45723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45726 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45731 \begin_inset Newline newline
45735 \begin_inset Flex URL
45738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45740 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45748 \begin_layout Bibliography
45749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45750 LatexCommand bibitem
45751 key "latexcompanion"
45755 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45757 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45760 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45763 \begin_layout Bibliography
45764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45765 LatexCommand bibitem
45770 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45773 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45776 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45779 \begin_layout Bibliography
45780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45781 LatexCommand bibitem
45788 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45791 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45794 \begin_layout Bibliography
45795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45796 LatexCommand bibitem
45808 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45811 \begin_layout Bibliography
45812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45813 LatexCommand bibitem
45819 \begin_inset Newline newline
45823 \begin_inset Flex URL
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45828 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45836 \begin_layout Bibliography
45837 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45838 LatexCommand bibitem
45844 \begin_inset Newline newline
45848 \begin_inset Flex URL
45851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45853 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45861 \begin_layout Bibliography
45862 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45863 LatexCommand bibitem
45869 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45871 name "Documentation"
45872 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45881 \begin_inset Newline newline
45885 \begin_inset Flex URL
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45898 \begin_layout Bibliography
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45900 LatexCommand bibitem
45906 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45908 name "Documentation"
45909 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45913 how to use the program
45918 \begin_inset Newline newline
45922 \begin_inset Flex URL
45925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45927 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45935 \begin_layout Bibliography
45936 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45937 LatexCommand bibitem
45943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45945 name "Documentation"
45946 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45955 \begin_inset Newline newline
45959 \begin_inset Flex URL
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45972 \begin_layout Bibliography
45973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45974 LatexCommand bibitem
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45982 name "Documentation"
45983 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45992 \begin_inset Newline newline
45996 \begin_inset Flex URL
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46009 \begin_layout Bibliography
46010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46011 LatexCommand bibitem
46017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46019 name "Documentation"
46020 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46024 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46025 \begin_inset Newline newline
46029 \begin_inset Flex URL
46032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46042 \begin_layout Bibliography
46043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46044 LatexCommand bibitem
46050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46052 name "Documentation"
46053 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46057 of the LaTeX-package
46062 \begin_inset Index idx
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46072 \begin_inset Newline newline
46076 \begin_inset Flex URL
46079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46081 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46089 \begin_layout Bibliography
46090 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46091 LatexCommand bibitem
46097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46099 name "Documentation"
46100 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46104 of the LaTeX-package
46109 \begin_inset Index idx
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46113 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46119 \begin_inset Newline newline
46123 \begin_inset Flex URL
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46136 \begin_layout Bibliography
46137 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46138 LatexCommand bibitem
46144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46146 name "Documentation"
46147 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46151 of the LaTeX-package
46156 \begin_inset Index idx
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46166 \begin_inset Newline newline
46170 \begin_inset Flex URL
46173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46183 \begin_layout Bibliography
46184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46185 LatexCommand bibitem
46191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46193 name "Documentation"
46194 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46198 of the LaTeX-package
46203 \begin_inset Index idx
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46213 \begin_inset Newline newline
46217 \begin_inset Flex URL
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46230 \begin_layout Bibliography
46231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46232 LatexCommand bibitem
46238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46240 name "Documentation"
46241 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46245 of the LaTeX-package
46250 \begin_inset Index idx
46253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46254 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46260 \begin_inset Newline newline
46264 \begin_inset Flex URL
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46269 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46277 \begin_layout Bibliography
46278 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46279 LatexCommand bibitem
46285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46287 name "Documentation"
46288 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46292 of the LaTeX-package
46297 \begin_inset Index idx
46300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46307 \begin_inset Newline newline
46311 \begin_inset Flex URL
46314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46324 \begin_layout Bibliography
46325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46326 LatexCommand bibitem
46332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46334 name "Documentation"
46335 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46339 of the LaTeX-package
46344 \begin_inset Index idx
46347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46354 \begin_inset Newline newline
46358 \begin_inset Flex URL
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46371 \begin_layout Bibliography
46372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46373 LatexCommand bibitem
46379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46382 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46386 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46387 \begin_inset Newline newline
46391 \begin_inset Flex URL
46394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46404 \begin_layout Bibliography
46405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46406 LatexCommand bibitem
46412 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46415 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46419 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46420 \begin_inset Newline newline
46424 \begin_inset Flex URL
46427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46429 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46437 \begin_layout Bibliography
46438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46439 LatexCommand bibitem
46445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46448 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46452 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46453 \begin_inset Newline newline
46457 \begin_inset Flex URL
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46462 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46470 \begin_layout Bibliography
46471 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46472 LatexCommand bibitem
46478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46481 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46485 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46486 \begin_inset Newline newline
46490 \begin_inset Flex URL
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46503 \begin_layout Bibliography
46504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46505 LatexCommand bibitem
46511 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46514 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46518 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46519 \begin_inset Newline newline
46523 \begin_inset Flex URL
46526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46536 \begin_layout Bibliography
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46538 LatexCommand bibitem
46544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46547 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46551 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46552 \begin_inset Newline newline
46556 \begin_inset Flex URL
46559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46561 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46569 \begin_layout Bibliography
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46571 LatexCommand bibitem
46577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46580 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46584 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46585 \begin_inset Newline newline
46589 \begin_inset Flex URL
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46602 \begin_layout Bibliography
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46604 LatexCommand bibitem
46610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46613 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46617 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46618 \begin_inset Newline newline
46622 \begin_inset Flex URL
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46627 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46635 \begin_layout Bibliography
46636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46637 LatexCommand bibitem
46643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46646 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46650 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46651 \begin_inset Newline newline
46655 \begin_inset Flex URL
46658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46660 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46668 \begin_layout Bibliography
46669 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46670 LatexCommand bibitem
46676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46679 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46683 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46684 \begin_inset Newline newline
46688 \begin_inset Flex URL
46691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46693 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46701 \begin_layout Bibliography
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46703 LatexCommand bibitem
46709 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46712 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46716 about new features in
46721 \begin_inset Newline newline
46725 \begin_inset Flex URL
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46738 \begin_layout Standard
46739 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46773 \begin_inset Note Note
46776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46783 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46784 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46785 bibliography is the second one:
46793 \begin_layout Standard
46794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46795 LatexCommand bibtex
46796 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46797 options "biblio/alphadin"
46804 \begin_layout Standard
46805 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46808 \begin_layout Standard
46809 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46810 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46816 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46817 LatexCommand printindex